X5 M
X6 M
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW X5 M/BMW X6 M.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new
BMW X5 M/BMW X6 M. Also use the Integrated Owner's
Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on ve‐
hicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical
features available in your BMW X5 M/BMW X6 M. The manual
also contains information designed to enhance operating relia‐
bility and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value
of your BMW X5 M/BMW X6 M.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride
BMW AG
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/15, 07 15 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 244.
6 Information
At a glance
14 Cockpit
18 iDrive
26 Voice activation system
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
34 Opening and closing
53 Adjusting
64 Transporting children safely
69 Driving
86 Displays
104 Lights
109 Safety
132 Driving stability control systems
140 Driving comfort
155 Climate control
162 Interior equipment
173 Storage compartments
Driving tips
182 BMW X5 M and BMW X6 M Technology
184 Things to remember when driving
188 Loading
192 Saving fuel
Mobility
196 Refueling
198 Fuel
200 Wheels and tires
210 Engine compartment
213 Engine oil
216 Coolant
218 Maintenance
220 Replacing components
228 Breakdown assistance
233 Care
Reference
240 Technical data
243 Appendix
244 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
can be found in the appendix of the printed
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication and the short commands of the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐
arate user's manual, which is also included
with the onboard literature.
Additional sources of
information
A dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐
swer additional questions at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐
lected optional features or the country-specific
version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
The respectively applicable country provisions
must be observed when using the respective
features and systems.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Handbooks.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently from what is shown in
the illustrations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
can be found in the appendix of the printed
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g.
maintenance and repair, according to BMW
specifications with properly trained personnel,
referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
qualified service center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐
nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent
damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories were tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
ing the stability control system.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by employees of the dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if you need it. After an
error is corrected, the information in the fault
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
ous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Rear window safety switch 49
2 Power windows 48
3 Exterior mirror operation 61
4 Opening and closing the tail‐
gate 40
5 Unlocking central locking sys‐
tem 40
Locking central locking sys‐
tem 40
6 Lights
Front fog lights 107
Lights off
Daytime running lights 106
Parking lights 104
Low beams 104
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 105
Adaptive Light Control 106
High-beam Assistant 106
Instrument lighting 108
Night Vision, switch on/switch off
heat image 122
7 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 76
High beams, head‐
light flasher 76
High-beam Assistant 106
Roadside parking lights 105
On-board computer 97
8 Steering wheel buttons, left
M Drive 1 activation 133
M Drive 2 activation 133
Store speed 140
Resume speed 140
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 140
Cruise control rocker switch 140
9 Shift paddles 83
10 Instrument cluster 86
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation 26
Telephone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication
Thumbwheel for selection lists 96
12 Steering column stalk, right
Wiper 77
Rain sensor 78
Clean the windshields and head‐
lights 77
BMW X5 M: rear window wiper in
Canadian models 79
BMW X5 M: rear window
wiper 79
BMW X5 M: clean rear win‐
dow 79
13 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 70
14 Auto Start/Stop function 71
15 Horn, total area
16 Steering wheel heating 63
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
17 Adjust steering wheel 63 18 Unlock hood 211
All around the center console
1 Control Display 18
2 Glove compartment 173
3 Ventilation 158
4 Hazard warning system 228
Intelligent Safety button 116
5 Automatic climate control 155
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication
7 Controller with buttons 19
8 Drivelogic 83
9 Parking brake 73
Automatic Hold 74
10 PDC Park Distance Control 142
Rearview camera 145
Top View 148
Parking assistant 151
Side View 149
HDC Hill Descent Control 136
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
11 Engine Dynamics 85
Vertical Dynamic Control 137
Servotronic 138
12 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 134
13 Transmission selector lever 80
All around the roofliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 228
2 BMW X5 M: panoramic glass
sunroof 50
BMW X6 M: glass sunroof, pow‐
ered 50
3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐
senger airbag 111
4 Reading lights 108
5 Interior lights 108
6 Glasses compartment 175
Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
system and communication devices while driv‐
ing can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Control elements at a glance
Control elements
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
Information
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
duced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
the normal functions are re-established.
Switching on
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
Switch off
1. Press button.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller with navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
1.
Turn.
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Displays the previous display.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1.
Turn.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
2. Press.
3. Move in two directions.
Buttons on controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
Audio Open audio menu last listened
to, switch between audio me‐
nus.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Opens new display on top of previous
screen.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
1.
"Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
tive map.
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ The system recognizes capital and lower
case letters. For the input of upper/lower
case letters and numbers, it may be neces‐
sary to switch to the corresponding input
mode, e.g. when upper and lower case let‐
ters are written the same way. Switching
between cases, numbers and letters, refer
to page 25.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map and Internet
Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.
Function Controls
Move interactive map or
Internet sites.
Swipe into re‐
spective direc‐
tion.
Enlarge/shrink interactive
map or Internet sites.
Drag in or out on
the touchpad with
fingers.
Display the menu or open
a link in the Internet.
Tap once.
Changing settings
You may change control display settings via
touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button. The main menu is dis‐
played.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Symbol Meaning
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port in the front or in the
rear.
USB audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the on-board comupter.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
On the Control Display:
1. Press button.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This
means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Deleting personal in the
vehicle
The concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
leted through iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
▷ Travel and on-board comupter information.
▷ Music collection.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies.
▷ Voice notes
▷ Login accounts.
▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Continue"
6. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
On the Control Display:
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Tip controller up.
Without navigation system
Select symbol.
Entry comparison
Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
ters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during input
for which data is available.
▷ Target search: names of locations may be
entered in languages available through
Control Display.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements
during input.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 100.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, use func‐
tion via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for many functions.
You may select lists such as phone lists via
voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
actly as they show in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹.
E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
Seite 26
At a glance Voice activation system
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Executing functions using short
commands
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands for the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication Owner's Manual.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹.
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
One example: open the tone
settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command
The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Tone‹
Setting the voice dialog
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 228, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 28
At a glance Voice activation system
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
ping the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Scroll forward.
Seite 29
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐
rectly.
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu:
1.
Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
Seite 30
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Seite 31
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Remote control/key
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 46.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 35.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 218
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Opening the tailgate
4 Panic mode
Integrated key
Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
row 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Replacing the battery
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐
trol.
2. Raise the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Have old battery disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take it to a collection point.
New remote controls
New remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
The lost remote control can be blocked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emergency detection of remote
control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start
the engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐
mote control by external sources e.g., by
radio masts.
▷ Empty battery in remote control.
▷ Interference from radio transmissions
through mobile devices in close proximity
to remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine with emergency
detection of the remote control
If a respective Check Control message ap‐
pears, hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering col‐
umn. The tailgate button on the remote control
should be at the same height as the marked
area. Press the Start/Stop button within
10 seconds while pressing the brake pedal.
If the remote control is not recognized: slightly
change the height position of the remote con‐
trol and repeat the procedure.
Personal Profile
The concept
Personal Profile provides three profiles, using
which personal vehicle settings can be stored.
Every remote control has one of these profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐
tomatically applied.
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
saved in the personal profile.
Three personal profiles and a guest profile can
be created.
Adjusting
The settings for the following systems and
functions are saved in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings is country- and
equipment-dependable.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera
▷ Side View.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ M Drive: configurations.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.
▷ Night vision.
Profile management
Opening profiles
Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐
ferent profile may be activated.
About iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
tiated anymore between the settings for
the two remote controls.
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐
other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
file function.
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
The following export options are available:
▷ Via BMW Online.
▷ Via the USB port to a USB device.
Popular file systems for USB devices are
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐
ommended formats for profile export.
Other formats may not support the export.
Export is made via the USB port to a USB de‐
vice. Popular file systems for USB devices are
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recom‐
mended formats for profile export. Other for‐
mats may not support the export.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Importing profiles
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be
imported via BMW Online.
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐
ported via the USB interface.
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐
ported profile.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are saved in none of the three personal pro‐
files.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Guest"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Using the remote control
Information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is risk of injuries. Take the
remote control along so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 46,
the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The interior lights are switched on, when it
is dark outside, the courtesy lamps are also
switched on. This function is not available,
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
if the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ually.
▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this
function was activated.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 47, is
disarmed.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
The driver's door must be closed.
Press button on the remote control.
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are
being locked.
The alarm system, refer to page 47, is armed.
Switching on interior lights and
courtesy lights
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
The courtesy lamps are only switched on when
it is dark outside. This function is not available,
if the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ually.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
theft warning system, refer to page 48, are
turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
fore pressing the button again.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Opening the tailgate
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
The closed tailgate is automatically opened,
whether or not the vehicle is locked or un‐
locked.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 46.
The tailgate cannot be opened with the remote
control while a trailer is being towed.
If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is
locked again as soon as it closes. Take the re‐
mote control with you and do not leave it in the
cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is
locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is
closed.
CAUTION
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐
out remote control, refer to page 39.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Without remote control
From the outside
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
CAUTION
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
damaged. There is risk of property damage.
Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
1.
Remove lid on the door lock.
To do this, slide the integrated key into the
opening from below and remove the lid.
2. Unlock or lock door lock.
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Alarm system
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is
locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the
door lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 35.
From the inside
Unlocking and locking
Via the buttons for the central locking system.
▷
By pressing the button, the vehicle
is locked with the doors closed.
▷
Pressing the button unlocks the
vehicle.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press the central locking system
button to unlock the doors to‐
gether, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re‐
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time un‐
locks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Doors
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
WARNING
Thanks to Soft Close the closing goes
into the lock automatically. Body parts can be
jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during opening and closing.◀
Tailgate
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Automatic tailgate operation
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
When adjusting the opening height, ensure
that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm
above the tailgate.
1.
"Settings"
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
2. "Tailgate"
3. Turn the controller until the desired open‐
ing height is selected.
Opening
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
BMW X5 M:
BMW X6 M:
▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Opening with the remote control,
refer to page 38.
The tailgate cannot be opened with the re‐
mote control while a trailer is being towed.
▷ Press button in the driver's door.
The tailgate cannot be opened
with the remote control while the driver's
door is opened.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
The opening procedure is interrupted:
▷ By pressing a button again.
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Closing
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
BMW X5 M: The lower tailgate must be closed;
otherwise, a Check Control message will ap‐
pear.
Without Comfort Access:
▷ Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access:
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the tailgate.
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
BMW X5 M:
BMW X6 M:
▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
▷ Pull and hold the button in the
driver door. Releasing the button
stops window/roof movement.
The remote control must be located in the
interior for this function.
An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate
closes.
The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.
Manual operation
WARNING
With manual operation of a blocked tail‐
gate, it can loosen itself unexpectedly from the
blockage. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Do not operate the tailgate
manually if it is blocked. Have checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐
ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow
and smooth motion.
BMW X5 M: Manually unlocking the tailgate,
refer to page 43.
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
BMW X5 M: manual unlocking
When there is an electrical malfunction.
1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
2. In the lower tailgate, loosen and remove
the cover using the onboard vehicle tool kit
or a suitable object.
3. Pull the loop in the direction of the interior.
The tailgate is unlocked.
4. The top tailgate opens, press the loop back
in.
5. Insert and close the cover.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.
BMW X5 M: lower tailgate
Opening
Pull the lever and swing down the tailgate.
The open tailgate can be loaded with up to
550 lbs/250 kg.
Closing
Swing up the tailgate, and press it closed.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Opening the tailgate individually
▷ Open/close tailgate with no-touch activa‐
tion.
▷ Start the engine.
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Unlocking
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely,
arrow.
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control. .
Locking
Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicle
door, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 sec‐
ond without grasping the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control. .
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐
cle.
Convenient closing
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicle
door, arrow, with your finger and hold it there
without grasping the door handle.
This corresponds to pressing and holding
the remote control button.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press button on tailgate's exterior.
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control.
.
The situation of the doors does not change.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the trunk; otherwise, the remote con‐
trol is locked inside the vehicle when the tail‐
gate is closed.
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
BMW X6 M: Opening and closing the
tailgate with no-touch activation
General information
The tailgate can be opened and closed with
no-touch activation using the remote control
you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for‐
ward-directed foot motion in the center of the
area at the rear of the car and the trunk lid
opens and/or closes.
Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Foot movement to be carried out
WARNING
During no-contact activation, vehicle
parts may be touched, e.g. hot exhaust sys‐
tem. There is risk of injuries. With the foot mo‐
tion, make sure there is steady stance and do
not touch the vehicle.◀
1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,
about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.
2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
ately pull it back. With this movement, the
leg must pass through the ranges of both
sensors.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be closed inadvertently by an un‐
conscious or alleged recognized foot move‐
ment.
The sensor range reaches approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
behind the area at the rear of the car.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The hazard warning system flashes on and an
acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate
closes.
The closing of the tailgate has no effect on the
locking of the vehicle.
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Another foot movement can interrupt the clos‐
ing operation.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be closed inadvertently by an un‐
conscious or alleged recognized foot move‐
ment.
The sensor range reaches approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
behind the area at the rear of the car.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 39.
Adjusting
Unlocking
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 35.
Doors
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate is opened.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
The tailgate is opened and the doors
unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 35.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Automatic locking
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 35.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel settings
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel position adjusted last will be stored for
the active profile.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and
steering wheel memory is pressed briefly.
Activating the setting
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Last seat position autom."
Alarm system
The concept
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the car.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Arming and disarming the alarm
system
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at
the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
door lock.
Tailgate and armed alarm system
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is armed.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again when the doors are locked.
The hazard warning system flashes once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is armed.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
Doors, hood or tailgate are not correctly
closed. Correctly closed access points are
secured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
When the still open access is closed, inte‐
rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will
be switched on.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or
switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 35.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
the remote control on your person, grasp
the driver side or front passenger side door
handle completely.
Power windows
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Seite 48
Controls Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Opening
▷
Press the button to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 38, via remote control.
Closing
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
refer to page 43.
Pinch protection system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is risk
of injuries. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Closing without the pinch protection
system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain margin.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Safety switch
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, e.g., from opening
and closing the rear windows using the
switches in the rear.
Seite 49
Opening and closing Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of the
windows, press the safety switch, e.g. if chil‐
dren or animals are carried in the rear.
Switching on and off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
Roller sunblinds
Roller sunblinds for the rear side
windows
Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook
it onto the bracket.
WARNING
With closed roller sunblinds and open
windows, the roller sunblinds can be loaded
heavily while driving due to the wind. The roller
sunblinds can be damaged and compromise
the passengers. There is risk of injuries. Do not
open the windows while driving if the roller
sunblinds are closed.◀
Glass sunroof
General information
BMW X5 M: panoramic glass sunroof.
BMW X6 M: glass sunroof, powered.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately, using the
same switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Tilting up and closing tilted glass
sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
tilted and the sliding visor
opens slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in its tilted
Seite 50
Controls Opening and closing
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
position. The sliding visor
does not move.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof is being closed.
The sliding visor does not move.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor separately
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor opens, as
long as the switch is held
down. If the sliding visor is
already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens.
The glass sunroof closes as
long as the switch is held
down. If the glass sunroof is
already closed or in the tilted
position, the sliding visor
closes.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor opens automatically. If the
sliding visor is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in the
tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐
tomatically.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch upward stops the motion.
▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 38, via remote control.
▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐
cess, refer to page 43.
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐
pletely opened, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by Pressing
the switch.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing.
The glass sunroof reopens slightly.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Closing from the open position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain margin.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Seite 51
Opening and closing Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the glass sun‐
roof and sliding visor are
completely closed.
▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐
tection.
Seite 52
Controls Opening and closing
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Adjusting
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 56.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 58.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 109.
Front seats
Information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust
the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest in an as upright position as possible
and do not adjust again while driving.◀
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Electrically adjustable seats
Overview
1 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory
2 Shoulder support
3 Backrest width
4 Lumbar support
5 Backrest, head restraint
6 Forward/back, height, tilt
7 Thigh support
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer
to page 46, is activated for this purpose.
Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Adjustments in detail
1. Forward/backward
2. Height
3. Seat tilt
4. Backrest tilt
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Adjust the position using the lever.
Sport seat
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
Shoulder support
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Front seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the journey is continued within approx. 15
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐
ically with the temperature selected last.
Switch off
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and
backrest can be distributed in different ways.
On the Control Display:
1. "Climate"
2. "Front seat heating"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Active seat ventilation, front
The concept
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐
cle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Overview
Active seat ventilation button
Switching on
Press button once for each ventilation
level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs
are lit.
Seite 55
Adjusting Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
After a short time, the system automatically
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switch off
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Rear seats
Second row of seats
Information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There is
risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of
movement of the center armrest is clear during
folding down.◀
Rear seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the journey is continued within approx. 15
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐
ically with the temperature selected last.
Switch off
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the
belt out of the holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
sengers sitting on the left and right.
▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solely
intended for the center passenger.
Information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more
than one person to wear a single safety belt.
Infants and children are not allowed in an occu‐
pant's lap, but must be transported and re‐
spectively secured in designated child restraint
systems.◀
Seite 56
Controls Adjusting
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries
or danger to life. If you are using the middle
safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the belt twist-free and as tight to
your body as possible over your lap and
shoulders.
▷ Wear the belt deep on your hips over your
lap. The belt may not press on your stom‐
ach.
▷ Do not wear the belt on your throat, rub it
on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in across
hard or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
Buckling the belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
Tensioning the safety belt
automatically
When the belt is closed, it is automatically
tightened once after the release.
Unbuckling the belt
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐
nism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Safety mode
In critical situations, e.g., during full brake ap‐
plication, the front safety belts tighten auto‐
matically.
If the situation passes without an accident oc‐
curring, the belt tension relaxes.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.
Damage to safety belts
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
Seite 57
Adjusting Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
aged otherwise:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Front head restraints
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjust the headrest via the backrest tilt as
needed.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐
tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐
ically reduces the distance from the head.
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
aged otherwise:
Have the active headrest checked and if
needed replaced.
Adjusting the height
Adjusting electrically.
Seite 58
Controls Adjusting
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Distance to the back of the head:
basic seat
▷ Forward: by pulling.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
Distance to the back of the head:
M multifunctional seat
The head restraint is automatically reposi‐
tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
BMW X5 M: rear head
restraints
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
The center head restraint cannot be adjusted
in elevation.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Seite 59
Adjusting Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
The center head restraint cannot be removed.
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory
The concept
Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and
called up. Settings for the backrest width and
lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is risk of an accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Overview
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button briefly. The LED in
the button lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
If the SET button is pressed accidentally:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. If necessary, switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1.
Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Seite 60
Controls Adjusting
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently
used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if this function is active.
Information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.
while changing lanes. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic be‐
hind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
1 Adjusting 61
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out 62
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 60.
Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror.
Automatic Curb Monitor
The concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.
Seite 61
Adjusting Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Activating
1.
Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Fold in and out
CAUTION
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in car washes. There is
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Beneficial in the following situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
med. Photocells are used to control the Interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 62.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
The concept
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Seite 62
Controls Adjusting
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Power steering wheel adjustment
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐
rections.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
to page 60.
Heated steering wheel
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 63
Adjusting Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The right place for children
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Children should always be in the rear
WARNING
Persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐
ditional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident
or during braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure
persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suita‐
ble restraint systems.◀
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
child restraint systems provided in accordance
with the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 111.
Information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
Seite 64
Controls Transporting children safely
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Installing child restraint
systems
Information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 111.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and adjust its height to the highest and
thus best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐
nently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
Seite 65
Transporting children safely Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.
LATCH child restraint system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child
restraint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
bols. It is not recommended to use the
inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH
positions to fasten a child restraint system on
the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat belt in‐
stead for the middle seat.
BMW X5 M:
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated in the gap between the seat and back‐
rest.
BMW X6 M:
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated behind the seat cover between the back‐
rest and the seat cushion.
Open the zipper to access the anchors.
Seite 66
Controls Transporting children safely
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Before installing LATCH child
restraint systems
Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
straint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper Top Tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Information
CAUTION
The mounting points for the upper re‐
taining straps of child restraint systems are
only provided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be
damaged. There is risk of property damage.
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐
per retaining straps.◀
BMW X5 M: retaining strap guide
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Raise the head restraint if needed.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
the backrest and the cargo cover.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
BMW X6 M: retaining strap guide
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
Seite 67
Transporting children safely Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Middle seat: raise the head restraint if
needed.
2. Outer seats: guide the upper retaining
strap over the head restraint.
Middle seat: guide the upper retaining
strap between the supports of the head re‐
straint.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
the backrest and the cargo cover.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Middle seat: lower and lock head restraints
as needed.
Securing of doors and
windows in the rear
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 49.
Seite 68
Controls Transporting children safely
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
The engine starts with the brake
pedal pressed when you press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again without
stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Information
When switching off the ignition, the selector
lever position P is selected automatically if the
selector lever position D or R is selected.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are activated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are turned off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
approx. 15 minutes of no use.
Radio ready state
Activate radio-ready state: when the engine is
running: press the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g.,
the ignition is automatically switched off for the
following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,
the daytime running lights are activated.
Starting the engine
Information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
CAUTION
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
risk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐
ing in quick succession.◀
M Steptronic Sport transmission
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Engine stop
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
Seite 70
Controls Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
Before driving into a car wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐
serve instructions for going into an automatic
car wash, refer to page 233.
M Steptronic Sport transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to
a stop.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving
off.
Semi-automatic mode
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state, refer to page 72.
When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it
is available when the vehicle is traveling faster
than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held
by Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is
ready for an Automatic engine
start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
Seite 71
Driving Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: press
the accelerator pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Change from selector lever position D to N,
R or D/S.
▷ The accelerator and the brake are pressed
at the same time.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
Preventing automatic engine stop
The concept
To make it possible to drive off very quickly,
such as at an intersection, the automatic en‐
gine stop can be actively prevented.
Preventing an engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill:
▷ Immediately after the vehicle comes to a
standstill, briefly press the brake pedal
forcefully.
▷ Then press the brake pedal with normal
braking force.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Seite 72
Controls Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e. g., when
leaving it.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
P is engaged automatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons
as if the driver were absent.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
While driving
Use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lights light
up.
Seite 73
Driving Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Press the switch while pressing on the
brake pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off.
Overview
Automatic Hold
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
Under the following conditions, Automatic
Hold is automatically deactivated and the park‐
ing brake is set:
▷ The engine is switched off.
▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐
still using the parking brake.
The indicator lamp switches from
green to red and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Seite 74
Controls Driving
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Activating
This function can be activated when the driv‐
er's door is closed, the safety belt is fastened
and the engine is running.
Press button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating
Press button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐
matic Hold is deactivated automatically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐
tomatically secured against rolling after brak‐
ing to a standstill.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic
Hold engages the parking brake. It prevents
the vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is
risk of property damage. Deactivate Automatic
Hold prior to entering the car wash.◀
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the
engine is switched off while the vehicle is be‐
ing held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
Automatic Hold remains activated during the
engine stop brought about by the Auto Start/
Stop function.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it.
Manual release
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
Seite 75
Driving Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
The parking brake can be released manually in
the event of a power failure or electrical fault.
Unlocking
If the parking brake has been released man‐
ually in response to a malfunction, only quali‐
fied technicians should return it to operation.
1. Open the left side trim in the trunk.
2. Remove the first-aid kit and warning trian‐
gle.
3. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit under the cargo floor panel
into the strap of the release point, see ar‐
row.
4. Forcefully pull the screwdriver up against
the mechanical resistance until you notice
a marked increase in the resistance and
the parking brake releases audibly.
5. Stow the screwdriver, warning triangle and
first-aid kit, and close the left side trim in
the trunk.
After a power failure
WARNING
The function of the parking brake is not
ensured if it was unlocked manually without
power loss. There is risk of an accident. Only
operate the parking brake if it was unlocked
manually due to a power loss.◀
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1. Switch on the ignition.
2.
Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or transmission position P
is set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
The turn signal lever returns into is starting po‐
sition after actuation.
To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
the resistance point.
Seite 76
Controls Driving
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Triple turn signal activation
Slightly tap lever.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Information
CAUTION
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor overheat on switching on. There is risk
of property damage. Defrost the windshield
prior to switching the wipers on.◀
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, damage may occur to parts of the
vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
Switching on
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
Seite 77
Driving Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
Switch off and brief wipe
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
Interval mode or rain sensor
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.
CAUTION
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is risk of property damage. Deactivate
the rain sensor in car washes.◀
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Seite 78
Controls Driving
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Clean the windshield, headlights
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐
vated.
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze if needed.◀
CAUTION
When the wiper water container is
empty, the wash pump cannot work as in‐
tended. There is risk of property damage. Do
not use the washer system when the wash wa‐
ter container is empty.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
BMW X5 M: rear window wiper
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward,
arrow 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is
engaged, the system switches to continuous
operation.
Cleaning rear window
In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐
row 2. The switch automatically returns to its
interval position when released.
In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3.
The switch automatically returns to its idle po‐
sition when released.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Fold wipers back when you want to change the
blades or with pending low temperatures.
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, damage may occur to parts of the
vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
Seite 79
Driving Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
Information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work under the
hood can damage components and lead to a
safety risk. There is risk of accidents or risk of
property damage. Have work under the hood
be executed by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Washer fluid reservoir
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir in the engine compartment.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
turer's recommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the
right mixture.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
water; this could damage the wiper system.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
ferent manufacturers because they can clog
the windshield washer nozzles.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
M Steptronic Sport
transmission
General information
The M Steptronic Sport transmission is oper‐
ated via the selector lever or two shift paddles
on the steering wheel.
Functions
▷ Drive mode or Sequential mode.
▷ Various drive programs, Drivelogic.
▷ Upshifting display, Shift point indicator, re‐
fer to page 102.
Seite 80
Controls Driving
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Automatic downshifting and protection
from misshifting even in sequential mode.
▷ Launch Control.
▷ Low Speed Assistant.
Selector lever, selector lever positions
Overview
▷ R: reverse gear.
▷ N: neutral.
▷ Center position, forward position.
▷ +: manual upshifting.
▷ -: manual downshifting.
▷ D/S: switch between drive mode and se‐
quential mode.
Engaging a selector lever position
Press on the brake pedal and pull or push the
selector lever in the corresponding direction.
As soon as the selector lever is released, it re‐
verts to the center position. In position R, the
selector lever locks.
The engaged selector lever position is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster and on the se‐
lector lever.
If a selector lever position is engaged, the vehi‐
cle may start rolling, after the brake is released,
e.g. on downhill slopes. Thus, drive off immedi‐
ately after releasing the brake.
Use the Slow Speed Assistant for maneuver‐
ing and during stop-and-go traffic.
Low Speed Assistant
The concept
The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at
very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking
speed.
This can also be used for rocking the vehicle in
the snow. To do this, switch between reverse
gear and forward gear without stepping on the
brakes in the process.
Activating
1. Engage a driving position.
2. Briefly tap the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle rolls at minimum speed.
This is possible in 1st and 2nd gear and in re‐
verse gear.
Deactivating
Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to a
stop.
Flashing display on the selector lever
The actually engaged transmission position
can deviate from the selector lever position in
some situations. The display in the selector
lever flashes.
Observe the display in the instrument cluster,
refer to page 82, in these cases.
D Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are automati‐
cally changed.
Kickdown: for maximum acceleration, e. g.
when passing. To do this, depress the acceler‐
ator pedal past the resistance point.
Switch to Sequential mode: shift using the
shift paddles or the selector lever, or push the
selector lever in the D/S direction.
S Sequential mode
Use the shift paddles or the selector lever to
upshift or downshift without letting off the gas.
Seite 81
Driving Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Maximum speed: once maximum engine
speed is attained, upshifting is not auto‐
matically performed in sequential mode. In
addition, the kickdown is deactivated.
▷ Shortly before falling below a gear-de‐
pendent minimum speed, the transmission
is automatically downshifted.
▷ Upshifting or downshifting is done only if
the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate.
For example, there is no downshifting if the
engine speed is too high.
▷ Kickdown: the lowest possible gear is se‐
lected by simultaneously operating the
kickdown and the left shift paddle or selec‐
tor lever.
▷ It is also possible to start out in 2nd gear,
e. g. on icy roads.
Switch to Drive mode: push selector lever in
D/S direction.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
It is also possible to rock the vehicle up to
6 mph/10 km/h. To do this, switch between
forward gear and reverse gear without step‐
ping on the brakes in the process.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, e.g. The vehicle
can then roll, refer to page 233.
P Park
The drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
page 69, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 69, and when position R
or D is set.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is set.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake is released
while the vehicle is stationary and position
D or R is set.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Drive mode
▷ Engaged gear together with
a D, arrow 1.
▷ Selected driving program,
Drivelogic, refer to
page 83, arrow 2.
Sequential mode
▷ Engaged gear, arrow 1.
▷ Selected driving program,
Drivelogic, refer to
page 83, arrow 2.
▷ Gear shift indicator, refer to
page 95
Information
When the external temperature is very low, the
display may not work. Current driving direction
is recognizable at the engaged selector lever
position.
Gear change
Shifting in Sequential mode possible.
A shift in Drive mode causes a switch to Se‐
quential mode.
Using the selector lever
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
Seite 82
Controls Driving
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Using the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
Drivelogic
Various driving programs are available.
After each switch between Sequential mode
and Drive mode, the last program selected is
an active.
Exception: after each engine start, driving pro‐
gram 1 is active in Drive mode.
In Drive mode
Choice of three driving programs:
▷ 1: efficient driving.
▷ 2: relaxed driving.
▷ 3: sporty driving.
In Sequential mode
Choice of three driving programs:
▷ 1: comfortable shifting operations.
▷ 2: sporty, fast shifting operations.
▷ 3: maximum shifting speed, Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 84.
Selecting driving program using
button in center console
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired driving program is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Selecting driving program using
M Drive
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Mode"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
▷ "D": drive mode
▷ "S": sequential mode.
6. "Shift position"
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
8. Selecting another driving program.
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
▷
Seite 83
Driving Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
WARNING
Depending on the setting, the DSC may
only be available to a limited extent or may not
be available with activated M drive. There is
risk of accidents or risk of property damage.
Heed the settings for DSC in the M drive and
react actively if necessary. Adapt your driving
style and react if necessary.◀
Display in the instrument cluster
Selected driving program corre‐
sponds to the number of illumi‐
nated fields.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from the danger area.
Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin
the engine.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start.
3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐
tion N.
A corresponding Check Control message
is displayed.
4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐
tion N within approx. 6 seconds.
Selector lever position N is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
Launch Control
The concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 184, period.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Activate Launch Control
1.
Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control, refer
to page 135, or activate M Dynamic mode,
refer to page 134.
2. Select Sequential mode with gear 1 and
driving program 3.
3. With the engine running, firmly apply the
brake with the left foot.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal far enough
that a flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Keep accelerator pedal in this position.
The starting engine speed adjusts.
5. Within 3 seconds, release the brake. The
vehicle accelerates.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as
the flag symbol is displayed and the accel‐
erator pedal is not released.
Launch Control is available again only after the
transmission is cooled down to a certain de‐
gree.
Seite 84
Controls Driving
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
M Driving Dynamics Control
The concept
The M Driving Dynamics Control affects the
response of the vehicle to accelerator pedal
movements.
Programs
Response behavior options:
▷ "Efficient": efficient, comfortable. Minimal
fuel consumption.
Ideal e. g. in city traffic or on snow.
▷ "Sport": sporty, dynamic.
▷ "Sport Plus": spontaneous, direct. Maxi‐
mum dynamics.
Selecting a channel
Via M Drive
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired channel.
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
▷
Using the button
Press button repeatedly until the desired
program is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Display in the instrument cluster
Engine Dynamics Control with selected
program with activated Display of the
system states of the driving dynamics,
refer to page 93.
Seite 85
Driving Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 91
2 Speedometer
3 Messages, e.g. Check Control
4 Tachometer 91
5 Engine oil temperature 91
6 Current fuel consumption
7 Electronic displays 86
8 Reset miles 91
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 96.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 91.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 71.
▷ On-board computer, refer to page 97.
▷ Date, refer to page 92.
▷ Digital tachometer, refer to page 92.
▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 93.
Seite 86
Controls Displays
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Gear display with Drivelogic, refer to
page 92.
▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 91.
▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to
page 87.
▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to
page 93.
▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
▷ Range, refer to page 92.
▷ Service requirements, refer to page 94.
▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 95.
▷ System states of driving dynamics, refer to
page 93.
▷ Time, refer to page 91.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Safety belt on the driver's side is not
buckled. For some country-specific
models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
seat.
Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the
driver or passenger side is not buckled. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For additional information, refer to Re‐
lease parking brake, refer to page 74.
Brake system
Braking system disrupted. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Front-end collision warning
Illuminated: advance warning is issued,
e.g., when there is the impending dan‐
ger of a collision or the distance to the
vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase distance.
Seite 87
Displays Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐
ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches
another vehicle at a relatively high differential
speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Pedestrian warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Avoid sudden braking as much as pos‐
sible. Braking force boost may not be
working. Stop cautiously. Take into ac‐
count the longer brake distance. Have
checked immediately by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and
braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐
lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving
style to the driving circumstances.
Illuminated: DSC failed. Have system checked
immediately by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 134.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control deactivated
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched off.
For additional information, refer to Dy‐
namic Stability Control DSC, refer to
page 134.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
M Dynamic Mode MDM is switched on.
For more information, see M Dynamic
Mode, refer to page 134.
Additional flashing: MDM controls the
drive and brake forces. The vehicle is
stabilized.
Illuminated: MDM failed. Have system
checked immediately by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For more information, see M Dynamic
Mode, refer to page 134.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
fer to page 115.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor
signals a loss of tire inflation pressure
in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
detected.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform
the reset of the system again.
Seite 88
Controls Displays
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked imme‐
diately by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 112.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have steering system checked imme‐
diately by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine functions
Have vehicle checked immediately by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to On-board
Diagnostics socket, refer to page 219.
Lane departure warning
System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
ture warning, refer to page 125.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
refer to page 76.
Parking lights, headlight control
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
For additional information, refer to
Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐
fer to page 104.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
For additional information, refer to
Front fog lights, refer to page 107.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are activated and off auto‐
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
uation.
For additional information, refer to High-beam
Assistant, refer to page 106.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐
trol elements on the steering wheel.
Automatic Hold
Function is activated. The vehicle is au‐
tomatically held in place when it is sta‐
tionary.
For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐
fer to page 74.
Seite 89
Displays Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are activated.
For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 77.
General lamps
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
M Drive
M Drive 1 is activated.
M Drive 2 is activated.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lights.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be faded for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are faded
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Seite 90
Controls Displays
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 196.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in
the red warning field. In this
range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
middle or in the left half of
the temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. A Check Control
message is also displayed.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Odometer and trip odometer
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Show/reset kilometers
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g. on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is risk
of an accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Time
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time for‐
mat, refer to page 99.
Seite 91
Displays Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Date
The date is displayed in the on-
board comupter.
Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 100.
Digital tachometer
Display
The current speed is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Activate display
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Digital speedometer"
Adjusting the unit
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Dig. speedo:"
4. Select the desired unit.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Gear display with Drivelogic
Sequential mode
▷ Engaged gear, arrow 1.
▷ Selected driving program,
Drivelogic, refer to page 83,
arrow 2.
Drive mode
▷ Engaged gear together with
a D, arrow 1.
▷ Selected driving program,
Drivelogic, refer to page 83,
arrow 2.
Range
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, e.g. taking
curves aggressively, the engine function is
not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
With navigation system: range with
destination guidance active
If respective equipment is fitted
and destination guidance is ac‐
tive, the remaining range is dis‐
played when the destination is
reached.
Seite 92
Controls Displays
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Current fuel consumption
Display
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the current fuel
consumption can be displayed
in the instrument cluster. Check
whether you are currently driv‐
ing in an efficient and environmentally-friendly
manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. If necessary, "M dynamic driving syst."
The display for the current fuel con‐
sumption is active.
Display of the dynamic driving sys‐
tems, refer to page 93.
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery
Display
The energy of motion of the ve‐
hicle is converted to electrical
energy while coasting. The vehi‐
cle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be re‐
duced.
Displaying energy recovery
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. If necessary, "M dynamic driving syst."
The display for the energy recovery is
active.
Display of the dynamic driving sys‐
tems, refer to page 93.
EfficientDynamics display
Displaying Efficient Dynamics
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed while driving.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
Dynamic driving systems
Display
The dynamic driving system
states are displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Seite 93
Displays Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Symbols Description
M Engine Dynamics Control, refer
to page 85.
Vertical Dynamic Control, refer to
page 137
Servotronic, refer to page 138.
Activate display
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. If necessary, "M dynamic driving syst."
The display for the dynamic driving
systems is active.
Display for current consumption, refer
to page 93, and energy recovery, refer to
page 93.
Service requirements
The concept
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service cen‐
ter before a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
Seite 94
Controls Displays
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
The gear shift indicator is active in the sequen‐
tial mode of the M Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Displays
Symbol Description
Shift up to fuel efficient gear.
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
Speed limit detection
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection shows the current maxi‐
mum permitted speed in the instrument clus‐
ter. The camera in the area of the interior rear‐
view mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of
the road as well as variable overhead sign
posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet
road conditions, etc. are also detected and
compared with the vehicle's onboard data,
such as for the rain sensor, and will be dis‐
played depending on the situation. The system
takes into account the information stored in
the navigation system and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Speed limit information"
Seite 95
Displays Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐
ment cluster via the on-board comupter.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:
Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.
Speed limit detection is not
available.
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐
strument cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Seite 96
Controls Displays
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.
On-board computer
Indication in the info display
The information from the on-
board computer is shown in the
info display in the instrument
cluster.
Calling up information on the info
display
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
Information is displayed in the info display of
the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
the info display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Compass display in the navigation system.
Adjusting the info display
Depending on the vehicle equipment version,
you can select what information from the on-
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
Seite 97
Displays Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
on-board comupter.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer
to page 95, function.
Compass
With a navigation system: com‐
pass display for the driving di‐
rection.
Trip on-board computer
The vehicle features two types of on-board
computers.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Resetting the trip on-board computer
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the on-board comupter or trip on-
board computer on the Control Display.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption or
speed
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Seite 98
Controls Displays
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Sport displays
The concept
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displaying sport displays on the
Control Display
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
The concept
Displays a speed, when reached, should cause
a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. Press the controller.
Speed warning is stored.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
speed warning.
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
Seite 99
Displays Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Auto time set"
Date
Setting the date
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 27.
Units of measurement
Setting the units of measurement
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Seite 100
Controls Displays
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Head-up Display
Overview
The concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e. g., the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
Information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
up Display, refer to page 236.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Switching on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Standard view
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
M view
1 Current engine speed, highlighted
2 Shift point indicator
3 Pre-warning field, speed display
4 Red warning field, speed display
5 Speed
6 Gear display/warning messages
Activate M view:
Select displays in the Head-up Display.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
Seite 101
Displays Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Adjusting the height
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller until the desired height
is reached.
5. Press the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Only set the rotation while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary and the ignition is switched on.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
have the special windshield replaced by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Shift point indicator
General information
The display is in the Head-up Display.
Shift point indicator in the Head-up
Display
Switching on
Shift lights are only shown in the Head-up Dis‐
play in the M view, refer to page 101.
1.
Switch on Head-up Display, refer to
page 101.
2. "Settings"
3. "Head-Up Display"
4. "Displayed information"
5. "M View"
Seite 102
Controls Displays
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Display
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the
tachometer.
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated
fields indicate the upcoming upshift mo‐
ment.
▷ Arrow 2: fields are illuminated in red. Do
not wait any further to shift.
When the maximum possible speed is
reached, the entire display flashes.
When the maximum speed is exceeded, the
supply of fuel is interrupted in order to protect
the engine.
Seite 103
Displays Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch elements is located next to the
steering wheel.
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights
Automatic headlight control
Adaptive Light Control
Lights off
Daytime running lights
Symbol Function
Parking lights
Low beams
Instrument lighting
Parking lights, cornering
lights and roadside parking
lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking lamp, refer to page 105.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Seite 104
Controls Lights
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Roadside parking lights
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switch off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
Depending on the equipment, when switching
off the vehicle, switch position or .
The parking and interior lights light up briefly
when the vehicle is unlocked and depending
on the ambient brightness.
Activating/deactivating
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio-
ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Automatic headlight control
The concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, e.g. in tunnels, in twilight or if there is
precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lights are activated.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up when the low beams are switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
Seite 105
Lights Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
Activating
Position of switch
with the ignition
switched on.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
The turning lights are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the turning lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights compensate for
acceleration and braking operations in order
not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
optimum illumination of the roadway.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the low beams are activated, this system
automatically switches the high beams on and
off or suppresses the light in the areas that
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐
trolled by a camera on the front of the interior
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are activated whenever the traffic
situation allows. The driver can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams on and off
as usual. In the low speed range, the high
beams are not switched on by the system.
Seite 106
Controls Lights
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Activating
1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
switch into position or .
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams. Depend‐
ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the
areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,
the blue indicator light will stay on.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever, refer to
page 107.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In situation that
require this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
The low beams must be switched on.
Press button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 105, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
Seite 107
Lights Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights
and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐
cally.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lights
Press button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lights.
Ambient light
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
Selecting color scheme
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Lighting design"
4. Select desired setting.
To deactivate the ambient light: "Off".
Setting the brightness
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 108
Controls Lights
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 109
Safety Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information for optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impacted, the
airbag system cannot protect as intended or
cause additional injuries due to triggering.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Ob‐
serve the Information for optimum protective
effect of the airbag system.◀
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area.
▷ There should be no persons, animals or
objects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
devices or' mobile phones.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is risk of
injuries. Do not touch individual components.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
spective accident severity. There is risk of
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 110
Controls Safety
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
The concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
Information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
WARNING
The ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, it must be detected, whether a
person occupies the front passenger seat. The
entire seat cushion area must be used for this
purpose. There is risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
Seite 111
Safety Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
size is detected on the seat. The airbags
on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐
factured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat.
With a respective message appearing on Con‐
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep
the accuracy of this function over the long-
term.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
and tire temperature.
Information
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 200.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Seite 112
Controls Safety
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
The status is displayed.
Status control display
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
the last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
for this may be:
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ Malfunction.
Status information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Carry out reset
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
On the Control Display and on the vehicle:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
tus is displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Low tire pressure message
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Identify the damaged wheel. Do so by
checking the tire inflation pressure using
the Mobility System. To correct the tire in‐
flation pressure
3. Repair flat tire with the Mobility System or
replace the damaged wheel.
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control.
Seite 113
Safety Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Required tire inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed in the
following situations
▷ The system has detected a wheel change,
but no reset was done.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
specifications.
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below
the level of the last confirmation.
In this case:
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire
change.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
reported though tire inflation pressures are
correct.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. These circumstances
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
very sharply.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
tected.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
Seite 114
Controls Safety
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
When initializing the once set inflation tire
pressures serve as reference values in order to
detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Identify the damaged wheel. Do so by
checking the tire inflation pressure using
Seite 115
Safety Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
the Mobility System. If the tire inflation
pressure in all tires is correct, the Flat Tire
Monitor may not have been initialized. In
this case, initialize the system.
3. Repair flat tire with the Mobility System or
replace the damaged wheel.
System limits
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system. Depending on
how the vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety
consists of one or more systems that can help
prevent a imminent collision.
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 117.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 119.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to
page 125.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 127.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
may not be output or they may be output too
late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
Seite 116
Controls Safety
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐
actions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
may not be output or they may be output too
late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Seite 117
Safety Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Seite 118
Controls Safety
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a relatively high dif‐
ferential speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and M Dynamic mode MDM is not activated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mir‐
ror is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
cess of false warnings.
Pedestrian warning
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
function warns of an imminent collision with
pedestrians during daytime or nighttime.
The function is subdivided into the following
systems:
Seite 119
Safety Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ During daytime: Pedestrian warning with
city braking function, refer to page 120
▷ At night: Night vision, refer to page 122
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
may not be output or they may be output too
late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Seite 120
Controls Safety
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and M Dynamic mode MDM is not activated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
Seite 121
Safety Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the front
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Night Vision with Pedestrian
and Animal Detection
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion is a night vision system.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of
the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects
pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm
objects that are similar in shape to human be‐
ings or animals are detected by the system. If
necessary, the heat image can be displayed on
the Control Display.
Heat image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and
cold objects a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object
and the background and on the level of heat
radiation emitted by the object. Objects that
are similar in temperature to the environment
or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐
tect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐
ent light, the image is only displayed when the
low beams are activated.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Pedestrian and animal detection
Object detection and warning only functions in
darkness.
Objects whose form is similar to people with
sufficient heat radiation are detected.
Seite 122
Controls Safety
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
In addition, the system also detects animals
above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer.
Display on the Control Display with heat image
activated:
▷ People detected by the system: in light
yellow.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark
yellow.
Range of object detection, with good ambient
conditions:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
490 ft/150 m
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐
prox. 230 ft/70 m
Environmental influences can limit the availa‐
bility of object detection.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
located in a residential area, the animal detec‐
tion is temporarily switched off.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switch on/switch off heat image
Camera
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
The camera lens is automatically cleaned to‐
gether with the headlights.
Seite 123
Safety Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
When it is dark outside, the system is automat‐
ically active after every driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Switching on heat image additionally
The heat image from the Night Vision camera
can also be displayed on the Control Display.
This function has no effect on object detec‐
tion.
Press button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the
Control Display.
Adjustments via the iDrive
With heat image switched on:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select brightness or contrast.
▷ Select the symbol.
▷ Select the symbol.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Display
Warning of people or animals in
danger
If a collision with a person or an animal de‐
tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐
bol appears on the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled
out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area for the pedestrian warning
consists of two parts:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
With animal warnings, no distinction is made
between the central or expanded area.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
Seite 124
Controls Safety
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed
increases, the area becomes longer and wider,
e.g.
Prewarning
The yellow symbol is displayed when a
person is detected in the central area
immediately in front of the vehicle.
The yellow symbol is displayed when a person
in the extended area is moving from the right
or left towards the central area.
The displayed symbol can vary with the people
detected.
Intervene actively by braking or make an eva‐
sive maneuver.
When animals are detected, an animal
symbol is displayed. The symbol also
shows the side of the road on which
the animal was detected. Intervene actively by
braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Acute warning
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
When animals are detected, an red animal
symbol is displayed with the signal tone.
Red symbol in the instrument cluster.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultane‐
ously in the Head-up Display and on
the instrument cluster. The displayed
symbol can vary with the people detected.
When animals are detected, an animal symbol
is displayed.
System limits
Basic limits
System operation is limited in situations such
as the following:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective
glass is damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian and animal
detection
In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐
trians are detected as animals or animals as
pedestrians.
Small animals are not detected by the object
detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐
ble in the image.
Limited detection, e.g. in the following circum‐
stances:
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
covered, especially when their heads are
covered.
▷ People who are not in an upright position,
e.g., lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
No display on the rear screen
The image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐
played on the rear screen.
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
Seite 125
Safety Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess
route and traffic situation. There is risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations. In the
event of a warning, do not unnecessarily jerk
the steering wheel.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning is automatically
activated after departure, if the function was
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
ped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
Seite 126
Controls Safety
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are turned
off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐
med.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes
and the steering wheel vibrates.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀
Seite 127
Safety Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Radar sensors
BMW X5 M:
BMW X6 M:
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐
cally activated after departure, if the function
was switched on the last time the engine was
stopped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Display
Lamp in the exterior mirror housing
Seite 128
Controls Safety
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐
ing indicates when there are vehicles in the
blind spot or approaching from behind.
WARNING
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing
flashes brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
Brief flashing
A brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un‐
locking serves as system self-test.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept
BMW X5 M:
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
and inner top brake lamps light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
lower brake lamps light up in addition.
BMW X6 M:
▷ During normal brake application, the bot‐
tom brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the top
brake lights light up in addition.
Seite 129
Safety Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Active Protection
General information
The Active Protection safety package consists
of systems that are independent of each other:
▷ Attentiveness assistant.
▷ PreCrash.
▷ PostCrash
Attentiveness assistant
The concept
The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this
situation, it is recommended that the driver
takes a break.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not
be detected in time. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions.◀
Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system is trained
about the driver, so that increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
PreCrash
The concept
With this system critical driving situations that
might result in an accident can be detected
above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In
these situations, preventive measures are au‐
tomatically taken to minimize the risk of an ac‐
cident as much as possible.
Critical driving situations may include:
▷ Emergency stop.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
Seite 130
Controls Safety
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
If the vehicle includes the front-end collision
warning or front-end collision warning with
braking feature, impending collisions with vehi‐
cles driving ahead or stopped in front of you
can also be detected within the system's
range.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
its, critical situation could not be detected reli‐
ably or in time. There is risk of an accident. Ad‐
just the driving style to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in
the respective situations.◀
Function
After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts
are automatically pretensioned once after the
vehicle is driven is away.
In critical driving situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as needed:
▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐
sioned.
▷ Automatic closing of the windows.
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.
▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats:
automatic positioning of the backrest for
the front passenger seat.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front belts are loosened again. All
other systems can be restored to the desired
setting.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.
PostCrash
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐
tervention by the driver in certain situations.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐
hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
braking. Destepping on the gas pedal also in‐
terrupts automatic braking.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
Seite 131
Safety Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle contains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Dynamic Performance
Control DPC
The Dynamic Performance Control increases
both the agility of the vehicle as well as the
lane stability.
The system seamlessly handles the distribu‐
tion of the drive torque between the two rear
wheels.
Depending on the situation, the drive torque is
shifted from the wheel on the inside of the
curve to the wheel on the outside of the curve
or vice-versa.
To increase the maneuverability, the rear
wheel on the outside of the curve is acceler‐
ated when the driving style is correspondingly
sporty.
The steering responds directly; simultane‐
ously, the understeering tendency of the four-
wheel drive is reduced.
With the oversteering tendency, the system
exerts a stabilizing effect by accelerating the
rear wheel on the inside of the curve.
The system noticeably improves the traction
and simultaneously increases the driving
Seite 132
Controls Driving stability control systems
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
safety, especially on road surfaces having fluc‐
tuating coefficients of friction.
M Drive
The concept
Individual settings can be carried out in two
preassigned configurations for the vehicle.
When the engine is started, an efficient driving
state is active by default. M Drive is deacti‐
vated.
Overview
Configurations
The configurations are preassigned as follows:
▷ "M Drive 1": relaxed, comfortable driving.
▷ "M Drive 2": sporty, dynamic driving.
Setting options
Symbol Meaning
Dynamic Stability Control DSC, re‐
fer to page 134, and M Dynamic
Mode MDM.
Programs of M Engine Dynamics
Control, refer to page 85.
Programs of Vertical Dynamic Con‐
trol, refer to page 137.
Programs of Servotronic, refer to
page 138.
Drivelogic, refer to page 83: shift
modes and Drivelogic driving pro‐
grams.
Views of the Head-up Display, refer
to page 101.
Configuring M Drive
The preassigned configurations can be individ‐
ually adjusted.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. Select the desired setting option.
4. Select the desired channel.
Individual settings are stored for the profile
currently used.
If M Drive is activated, a change in the setting
on the Control Display is immediately adopted.
Activating/deactivating M Drive
Activating
Press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷ Activate M Drive 1.
▷ Activate M Drive 2.
If DSC OFF or MDM is set in M Drive, a mes‐
sage appears in the instrument cluster. This
message is confirmed by pressing the button
again.
Deactivating
Press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel.
Indicator lights
▷ Indicator lamp comes on: corre‐
sponding M Drive is activated.
▷ Indicator lamp flashes: M Drive
could not be activated. Antilock
braking system ABS or Dynamic
Stability Control DSC directly regu‐
late the driving stability.
Reactivate M Drive if indicator lamp
is no longer flashing.
Information
If M Drive is activated, individual settings can
also be modified outside of M Drive, e. g. using
Seite 133
Driving stability control systems Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
the buttons in the center console. This deacti‐
vates M Drive.
To reactivate all settings made for M Drive on
the Control Display, briefly press one of the fol‐
lowing buttons:
▷
▷
To adopt the changed settings in M Drive,
press and hold the corresponding button.
Resetting M Drive
Individual settings can be reset to default val‐
ues.
1.
"Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. "Reset M Drive 1" or "Reset M Drive 2"
4. "Yes"
To cancel resetting: "No"
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the power
wheels when driving off and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within
the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐
cle on a steady course by reducing engine
speed and by applying brakes to the individual
wheels.
Information
Adapt your driving style to the situation, for an
appropriate driving style is always the respon‐
sibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
even with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
margin by driving in a risky manner.
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g. with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
M Dynamic Mode makes it possible to drive on
a dry roadway with high longitudinal and trans‐
verse acceleration but with limited driving sta‐
bility.
Only in the absolute limit area does the system
intervene for stabilization by reducing the en‐
gine power and by braking interventions on the
wheels. In this driving condition, additional
steering corrections may be necessary.
Seite 134
Controls Driving stability control systems
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
WARNING
When M Dynamic Mode is activated, sta‐
bilizing interventions are carried out only to a
reduced extent. There is risk of accidents or
risk of property damage. Adapt to traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations. In the event of
a warning, do not unnecessarily jerk the steer‐
ing wheel.◀
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Activating MDM
Press button briefly.
The MDM and DSC OFF indicator
lights on the instrument cluster light up.
Deactivating MDM
Press button.
The MDM and DSC OFF indicator
lights go out.
Via M Drive
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "MDM"
To open M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
▷
A message appears in the instrument cluster.
This message is confirmed by pressing the
button again.
Deactivating MDM
Press the appropriate button 1 or button 2 on
the steering wheel again.
M Dynamic Mode and the settings selected
under M Drive are deactivated.
Indicator/warning lights
Indicator lights light up:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
DSC indicator lamp also flashes:
M Dynamic Mode controls the drive
forces and brake forces.
Indicator lights light up:
M Dynamic Mode or DSC has failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Seite 135
Driving stability control systems Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Via M Drive
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "DSC OFF"
To open M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
▷
A message appears in the instrument cluster.
This message is confirmed by pressing the
button again.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
Display on the Control Display
Displaying xDrive view
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "xDrive status"
3. "xDrive view"
The following information is displayed:
▷ With a navigation system: compass display
for the driving direction
▷ Pitch attitude with degree and percentage
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication
▷ Graphic display for the steering
Displaying distribution of the drive
torque
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "xDrive status"
3. "Torque distribution"
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients. Without applying the
brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
walking speed.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed
to approx. walking speed and then keeps its
speed constant.
As long as there is active braking, the system
is on standby. The system does not brake the
vehicle during this time.
Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever
position D or R.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h
using the rocker switch of the cruise control on
the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be
changed by lightly accelerating.
Seite 136
Controls Driving stability control systems
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Press the rocker switch up to the point of
resistance: the speed increases gradually.
▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point
of resistance: the speed increases while
the rocker switch is pressed.
▷ Press the rocker switch down to the point
of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐
ally.
▷ Press the rocker switch down past the
point of resistance: when driving forward,
the speed decreases to approx.
6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed
decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Activating HDC
Press button; the LED above the button
lights up.
Deactivating HDC
Press button again and the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Display in the instrument cluster
The selected speed is displayed
in the speedometer.
▷ Green: the system is actively
braking the vehicle.
▷ Orange: the system is on
standby.
Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated
brake temperatures.
Vertical Dynamic Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort fitting road surface and driving style.
Programs
Setting options for calibrating the shock ab‐
sorbers:
▷ "Comfort": comfort-oriented.
▷ "Sport": balanced out.
▷ "Sport Plus": consistently sporty.
Selecting a channel
Via M Drive
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired channel.
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
Seite 137
Driving stability control systems Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
▷
Using the button
Press button repeatedly until the desired
program is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Display in the instrument cluster
Vertical Dynamic Control with selected
program with activated display of the
system states of the driving dynamics,
refer to page 93.
Servotronic
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
quired to turn the wheels in accordance with
the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering
force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐
ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐
creases, the assistance of the steering force is
reduced.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐
veyed.
Programs
Steering force setting options:
▷ "Comfort": low.
▷ "Sport": medium.
▷ "Sport Plus": high.
Selecting a channel
Via M Drive
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "M Drive 1" or "M Drive 2"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired channel.
When M Drive is active, setting is immedi‐
ately applied.
To activate M Drive with the selected settings,
press the corresponding button on the steer‐
ing wheel:
▷
▷
Using the button
Press button repeatedly until the desired
program is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Seite 138
Controls Driving stability control systems
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Display in the instrument cluster
Servotronic with selected program with
activated display of the System states
of the driving dynamics, refer to
page 93.
Self-leveling suspension
The concept
The self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicle
height and ground clearance constant. The
height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main‐
tained at a predefined level under all load con‐
ditions.
The system ensures consistent comfort by
keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit‐
uations.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system is disrupted. Vehicle handling may be
altered and driving comfort may be noticeably
reduced. Visit the nearest dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 139
Driving stability control systems Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Cruise control
The concept
The system maintains a preset speed via the
buttons on the steering wheel. The system
brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking
is insufficient.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Information
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press but‐
ton
Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupt,
refer to page 140
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 141
Resume speed, refer to
page 141
Rocker switch:
Maintain, store, change speed,
refer to page 141
Controls
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
The cruise control can be used.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
switched on if needed.
Switch off
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ If selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ If MDM is activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If HDC is activated.
Maintaining, storing, and changing the
speed
Information
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press button.
Or:
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
This is displayed, refer to page 142, in the
speedometer and briefly in the instrument
cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
switched on if needed.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed
Press button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
the system is active.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐
ble - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure
the distances from objects.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given with the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to
physical circumstances. There is risk of injuries
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while
PDC is not yet active.◀
Seite 142
Controls Driving comfort
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
PDC Park Distance Control
Ultrasound sensors
PDC sensors on the vehicle.
Functional requirements
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,
bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
To clean: when using high-pressure washers,
do not spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
PDC switches on automatically in the following
situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obsta‐
cles are detected behind or in front of the
vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower
than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
You may turn off automatic activation:
1. "Settings"
2. "Parking"
3. Select setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are located both in
front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating
continuous signal is sounded.
Seite 143
Driving comfort Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. "PDC"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
6. Press the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
Seite 144
Controls Driving comfort
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
Surround View
The concept
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 145.
▷ Top View, refer to page 148.
▷ Side View, refer to page 149.
Rearview camera
The concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Rearview camera
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 236.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Seite 145
Driving comfort Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Seite 146
Controls Driving comfort
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Obstacle marking
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the PDC sensors and, when respectively
equipped, detected by the rearview camera.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
Their colored margins of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 142.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from
the objects on the display.
Seite 147
Driving comfort Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Top View
The concept
Top View provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
General information
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors, by the rear‐
view camera and a camera on the front of the
vehicle.
The range is no more than approx. 6.5 ft/2 m to
the side, front and rear.
Obstacles within this range are thus displayed
early on the Control Display.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Top View
Cameras
Front camera
The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
ings. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 236.
Functional requirements
Top View can be used only to a limited extent
in the following situations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
The unavailable camera range is depicted by
shading.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
Seite 148
Controls Driving comfort
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
The rearview camera image is displayed. To
switch to the Top View:
"Rear view camera"
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Display
Display on the Control Display
The area surrounding the vehicle can be dis‐
played on the Control Display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, it is possible to switch to top view:
"Rear view camera"
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Displaying the turning radius and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning radius line shows
the space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
The lane line depends on the engaged
gear and the current steering angle. The
track line is continuously adjusted for the
steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
A Check Control message is displayed when a
camera is not working.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
the viewing, each camera, front and rear on the
vehicle, detects the traffic area on the side.
Seite 149
Driving comfort Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Which camera is active is shown on the top
edge of the screen.
Information
The images of the cameras are displayed, de‐
pending on the gear selected, on the Control
Display.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Side View
Cameras
Front camera
Rear camera
Two cameras are used for the detection.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 236.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
Depending on the transmission position, the
picture of the front or rear camera is displayed.
Switching off automatically
By switching into a different function or when
changing gears.
Front Side View: when a certain driving dis‐
tance or speed is exceeded.
Display
General information
The traffic area in front of or behind the vehicle
is displayed on the Control Display.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Seite 150
Controls Driving comfort
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Warning of crossing traffic
The concept
When an object approaching from the side is
detected by the front or rear camera, this is de‐
picted by a symbol in the Side View display.
Requirements
▷ Side View switched on.
▷ Your vehicle moves no faster than walking
speed.
▷ To detect approaching objects, sufficient
brightness, e.g., daylight is necessary.
Display
The yellow symbol is displayed if an
approaching vehicle is detected by the
camera.
A gray symbol is displayed if crossing
traffic cannot be detected.
System limits
In the following situations, the warning about
crossing traffic may be limited:
▷ In poor lighting or visibility conditions.
▷ If the camera is soiled or covered.
System limits
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the
distance from the objects on the display.
The viewing angle is approx. 180°.
Parking assistant
The concept
This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
lel to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and during the parking proce‐
dure takes control of steering, the acceleration
and braking and if needed changes the gears.
Hold down the parking assistant button for the
duration of the parking procedure. At the end
of the parking procedure, transmission posi‐
tion P is engaged.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information and instructions issued
by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
view camera and react accordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 142.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Seite 151
Driving comfort Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
CAUTION
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is risk of property
damage. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
terfere in the respective situations.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Parking assistant
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the side of the vehicle.
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Regarding the parking procedure
▷ Doors and tailgate closed.
▷ Parking brake released.
▷ Driver's safety belt fastened.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button
Press button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with the reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Switch off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press button.
Seite 152
Controls Driving comfort
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
System status
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant
is activated and search for parking space
active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀
1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
vate it if needed.
The status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
▷ Press button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
arise.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small.
Seite 153
Driving comfort Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
▷ When the button is released.
▷ If the tailgate is open.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration.
▷ When braking.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Flashing display on the selector lever
The actually engaged transmission position
can deviate from the selector lever position in
some situations after function interruption.
The display in the selector lever flashes.
Observe the display in the instrument cluster,
refer to page 82, in these cases.
Resume
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if needed.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display
to do this.
System limits
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
It can happen that parking spaces are detected
that are not suitable or suitable parking spaces
are not detected.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Seite 154
Controls Driving comfort
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Automatic climate control
1 Air distribution, left
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program, left
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat
5 Remove ice and condensation
6 Maximum cooling
7 Display
8 Air flow, AUTO intensity, right
9 AUTO program, right
10 Temperature, right
11 Air distribution, right
12 Seat heating, right 55
13 Active seat ventilation, right 55
14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
15 Cooling function
16 Rear window defroster
17 SYNC program
18 Active seat ventilation, left 55
19 Seat heating, left 55
Seite 155
Climate control Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat ventilation.
▷ If necessary, SYNC program.
Switch off
▷ Complete system:
Press and hold the left button on
the driver's side until the control
clicks off.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press and hold the left button on
the front passenger side.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Cooling function
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button.
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐
ting, warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 186, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, optimum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running is indicated.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 156, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Seite 156
Controls Climate control
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button on the driver's side to utilize the con‐
densation sensor. Make sure that air can flow
to the windshield.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Manual air distribution
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
▷ Windows: driver's side only.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the
condensation sensor.
SYNC program
The current settings on the driver's
side for temperature, air flow, air distri‐
bution, and AUTO program are transferred to
the front passenger side and to the left and
right rear.
The program is switched off if the settings on
the front passenger side or in the rear are
changed.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat
the interior.
Functional requirement
▷ Up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine.
▷ Warm engine.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
The availability of the function is shown on the
display of the automatic climate control.
Switching on
1.
Switch off the ignition.
Seite 157
Climate control Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
2.
Press the right side of the button
on the driver's side.
The symbol appears on the automatic cli‐
mate Control Display.
The interior temperature, air volume and air
distribution can be adjusted with the ignition
switched on.
Switch off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of
the button on the driver's side.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Defrosts windows and removes
condensation
Press button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
side windows as needed.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during
scheduled maintenance, refer to page 218, of
your vehicle.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature in
the upper body region, arrow 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
The set interior temperature for the driver
and passenger are not changed.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 3.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
interior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Seite 158
Controls Climate control
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 2.
▷ Thumbwheels for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 3.
BMW X5 M: ventilation, side
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 2.
Rear automatic climate
control
Overview
1 Temperature
2 AUTO program
3 Vent settings
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity
5 Display
6 Maximum cooling
7 Seat heating 56
Switching the rear automatic climate
control on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Rear climate"
The rear automatic climate control is not op‐
erational if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting or
defogging the windows is active.
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
Switch off
Press and hold the left button.
Seite 159
Climate control Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
32 ℉/0 ℃.
▷ When the engine is running.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically:
Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the upper body and into the foot‐
well.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed:
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Manual air distribution
The air distribution can be adjusted to individ‐
ual needs.
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
The system can be switched on and off di‐
rectly or by using two preset departure times.
The reel-on time is automatically determined
based on the temperature. The system
promptly switches on before the selected de‐
parture time.
Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Seite 160
Controls Climate control
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Functional requirements
Parked-car ventilation
▷ When the departure time is preselected:
depends on internal, external and set tem‐
perature.
▷ Direct operation: any external temperature.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate now"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
The system continues to run for some time af‐
ter being switched off.
Setting departure time
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. Select the departure time.
Turn the controller until the desired depar‐
ture time field has been selected and press
Controller.
4. Set the time.
Turn the controller until the desired time is
set and press the controller.
Activating the departure time
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. Activating the desired departure time:
"for departure at"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the departure time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 161
Climate control Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control
The concept
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
door, using the universal garage door opener.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the respective system is clear during program‐
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the instructions of the system
to be controlled, the system is gener‐
ally compatible with the universal garage door
opener.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Controls on the interior rearview
mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
Seite 162
Controls Interior equipment
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐
pends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior rearview mirror. The
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐
gin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior rearview mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior rearview mirror and the
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-
code wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐
ing-code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
features an alternating-code system. Flashing
and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
peat for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system,
the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
tem also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
To synchronize:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rearview mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior rearview mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
repeat this step up to three times in order
to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
zation is complete, the programmed func‐
tion will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
transmitter for the system to be controlled
approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The
required distance depends on the manual
transmitter.
Seite 163
Interior equipment Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that
the button on the interior rearview mirror
has been programmed. The system can
then be controlled by the button on the in‐
terior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
Controls
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
door, using the universal garage door opener.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the respective system is clear during program‐
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the system
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1.
Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to
the side.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Ashtray
Front
Opening
Slide the cover forward.
Seite 164
Controls Interior equipment
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Rear
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
Information
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g.
by carrying the remote control along when ex‐
iting the vehicle.◀
CAUTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Front
Overview
The lighter is located next to the ashtray.
Controls
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Rear
Overview
The cigarette lighter is located in the rear cen‐
ter console.
Controls
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Seite 165
Interior equipment Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Connecting electrical
devices
Information
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12V on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
terminals in the engine compartment.◀
CAUTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
Information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Front center console
Slide the cover forward.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Center armrest
Remove the cover.
Rear center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the trunk
Fold open the cover.
Seite 166
Controls Interior equipment
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
USB interface for data
transfer
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data
on USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35.
▷ Music collection, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
Information
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐
ing external devices.
With navigation system Professional
or TV: at a glance
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
Rear cooler
Information
WARNING
The cover of the opened cooler pro‐
trudes into the car's interior. Injuries can occur
in the event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. The content of the cooler can be
thrown into the car's interior and injure occu‐
pants. There is risk of injuries. Close the cooler
after use when driving.◀
Folding down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Opening
Pull on the opener and fold the cooler forward.
Switching on
The cooler can be operated at two levels.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2.
Press button once for each cooling
level.
Seite 167
Interior equipment Controls
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
The highest cooling power is active when
two LEDs are lit.
If the cooler was switched on the last time the
ignition was switched on, it will likewise be
switched on the next time the ignition is
switched on.
Switch off
Press button repeatedly until the LEDs go out.
Removing
1. Pull handles on both sides, arrows.
2. Fold both release levers up.
3. Pull cooler downward and remove it.
Installing
1. Fold the release levers with an angle of ap‐
prox. 45° and push the cooler forward onto
the contact up to the stop.
2. Fold both release levers down.
3. Pull handles, arrows 1, and press the re‐
lease levers, arrows 2, into the rails, until
they latch.
Malfunction
The cooler cannot be switched on or switches
off, e.g., when the cooling system overheats or
if the battery voltage is low. One of the LEDs
flashes.
Remedy the problem
1.
If necessary, allow the refrigerator cooling
system to cool down.
2. Start the engine.
3. Switch on cooler.
If the LED flashes even after a short time, have
the cooler checked by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 168
Controls Interior equipment
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
BMW X5 M: trunk
Cargo cover
Information
CAUTION
A cargo cover hooked in incorrectly can
cause damage. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Hook the cargo cover on both sides.◀
WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐
rior.◀
WARNING
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly
can jam body parts or cause damage. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Do
not let the cargo cover snap back into place.◀
Attaching
1.
Remove cargo cover, arrow 1.
2. Hook cargo cover into the brackets on both
sides, arrows 2.
Removing
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
gage.
1.
Press button, arrow 1, to unlock the cover.
2. Pull the cover back, arrow 2.
Installing
Slide the cover forward horizontally into the
two side brackets until it audibly latches. The
red warning fields disappear. Tug on the cover
to check if it is properly locked in place.
Enlarging the trunk
General information
The trunk can be enlarged by folding down the
rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The sides and the middle section
can be folded down separately.
Information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest is clear prior to
folding down.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
Seite 169
Interior equipment Controls
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g.
in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that
the backrest engages into the locking after
folding it back.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries
or danger to life. If you are using the middle
safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Folding down the sides
CAUTION
Screens in the rear can be damaged
when folding down the rear backrest. There is
risk of property damage. Make sure that the
area of movement is clear prior to folding down
the rear backrest.◀
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Folding down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Cargo area partition net
Information
WARNING
If the cargo net snaps back, it can cause
injuries or damage. There is risk of injuries or
risk of property damage. Do not let the cargo
area partition net snap back into place.◀
Hooking in
1.
Fold open the rear covers on the roofliner.
2. Pull the trunk partition net out of the case
by the strap.
3. Insert the bars into the brackets on both
sides in the roofliner toward the front, ar‐
row. This is best performed from the rear
seat.
Lowering
1.
Hold the rod on both side and release it
from the brackets.
Seite 170
Controls Interior equipment
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
2. Slowly slide the trunk partition net into the
case.
BMW X6 M: trunk
Cargo cover
Information
WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐
rior.◀
General information
Unfold cargo cover out towards the rear.
Removing
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
gage.
1.
Grasp folded-up cargo cover under the top
fold on both sides.
2. Pull the cover rearward out of the two side
brackets.
Installing
When installing, follow the reverse procedure.
1. Put the cargo cover in place left and right.
2. Lift the cover slightly to the rear and push
toward the front until it engages on both
side brackets.
Enlarging the trunk
General information
The trunk can be enlarged by folding down the
rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The sides and the middle section
can be folded down separately.
Information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest is clear prior to
folding down.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g.
in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
Seite 171
Interior equipment Controls
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
neuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that
the backrest engages into the locking after
folding it back.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries
or danger to life. If you are using the middle
safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Folding down the sides
CAUTION
Screens in the rear can be damaged
when folding down the rear backrest. There is
risk of property damage. Make sure that the
area of movement is clear prior to folding down
the rear backrest.◀
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Folding down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Ski and snowboard bag
General information
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the trunk.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.
Seite 172
Controls Interior equipment
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐
rior.◀
CAUTION
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 173.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 174.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 174.
▷ Storage compartment on the center con‐
sole, refer to page 174.
▷ Center armrest, refer to page 174.
▷ Glasses compartment, refer to page 175.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close
the glove compartment immediately after us‐
ing it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
Seite 173
Storage compartments Controls
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side
Information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close
the glove compartment immediately after us‐
ing it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable object, e.g. glass bottle, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is
risk of injuries. Do not stow any breakable ob‐
jects in the car's interior.◀
Storage compartment on the
center console
Opening
Slide the cover forward.
Closing
Slide the cover rearward.
Small storage compartment
Storage possibility for small objects, e.g.,
coins.
Center armrest
Front
Overview
Located in the center armrest between the
front seats is a storage compartment and de‐
pending on how the vehicle is equipped also
an elastic band on the left side and a cover for
the snap-in adapter.
Seite 174
Controls Storage compartments
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Opening
Push the cover down slightly and press the
button, see arrow. The respective cover folds
up.
Closing
Fold the respective cover down until it latches.
Connection for an external audio
device
An external audio device, e.g.,
an MP3 player, can be con‐
nected via the AUX-IN port or
the USB audio interface in the
center armrest.
BMW X6 M: rear
Overview
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
1.
Pull the loop and fold down the center arm‐
rest.
2. Pull the handle.
Closing
Press cover down until it latches.
Glasses compartment
Overview
The compartment for eye glasses is located
between the interior mirror and interior lights.
Opening
Press button.
Closing
Press the cover up until it latches.
Seite 175
Storage compartments Controls
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Cupholders
Information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injuries in the event of
an accident. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Front
Overview
In the center console.
Slide the cover forward.
Two cupholders are located in the center con‐
sole.
Rear
Information
CAUTION
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is risk of
property damage. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
Overview
In the center armrest.
Opening
1.
Pull the loop and fold down the center arm‐
rest.
2. Press button.
Closing
Press both covers inward back against each
other.
Seite 176
Controls Storage compartments
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Clothes hooks
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a danger of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk
of injuries and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g. clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
BMW X5 M:
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
BMW X6 M:
Two folding clothes hooks are provided in the
rear of the vehicle. Press sideways onto the
edge to fold open.
Storage compartments in the
trunk
Storage space under cargo floor panel
Fold up the cargo floor panel. The storage
space under the cargo floor panel is subdi‐
vided.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multifunction hooks
can lead to a danger of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is risk of injuries and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shopping
bags, from the multifunction hooks. Only
transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has
been appropriately secured.◀
Depending on the installed equipment version,
there are one or two multi-function hooks in
the cargo area.
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the left side
trim for fastening small objects.
Net
Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the
left side of the trunk.
Storage compartment on the right
side
A waterproof storage compartment is available
on the right side of the trunk.
Seite 177
Storage compartments Controls
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Left side storage compartment
Pull the handle.
Lashing eyes in the trunk with rail
To secure the cargo, refer to page 189, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Cargo net, FlexNet
To secure the cargo, refer to page 189, the
flexible cargo net can also be used.
Seite 178
Controls Storage compartments
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Seite 179
Storage compartments Controls
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
BMW X5 M and BMW X6 M Technology
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
V8 high-performance engine
With a 4.4 liter displacement, the V8 high-per‐
formance engine generates a maximum power
of 567 hp and a maximum torque of 553 lb
ft/750 Nm. With its spontaneous response be‐
havior, a speed range of wide utility results.
The maximum engine speed is 6,800 rpm and
is electronically controlled. Because of the
high engine dynamics, the maximum engine
speed with the vehicle stationary is reduced.
Warm-up
During the engine warm-up phase, the
V8 high-performance engine has a somewhat
rougher running behavior because of the emis‐
sion controls.
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system
has a slightly metallic undertone due to the na‐
ture of the system.
For more information about the warm-up pro‐
cedure: Engine speed, refer to page 91, and
engine oil temperature, refer to page 91.
Compound brake
The high-performance braking system has
perforated compound brake discs.
Because of particular structural characteristics,
there may be operation-related noises during
braking. However, this has no effect on per‐
formance, operational reliability and reliability
of the brake.
Correct braking
To keep the brake system in optimum condi‐
tion, it is expedient to apply them at regular in‐
tervals corresponding to the vehicle character.
Drivetrain
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system establishes
a permanent variable torque distribution to the
front and rear axles. The combination of xDrive
and Dynamic Performance Control in this vehi‐
cle ensures a high degree of driving dynamics
typical for BMW M.
With the activation of the M Dynamic mode,
dynamics and steering precision can be in‐
creased even more in all speed ranges.
Driving on racetracks
Requirements
Before driving on a racetrack:
▷ Participation in BMW Driver Experience
Training.
▷ Check engine oil fill level and replenish as
necessary.
▷ Have vehicle checked by a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Information
Racetrack operation leads to increased wear.
The vehicle is not designed for motorsports
Seite 182
Driving tips BMW X5 M and BMW X6 M Technology
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
competitive use. This wear is not covered by
the warranty.
The standard brake linings and the wear indi‐
cators are not designed for racetrack opera‐
tion. Additional information and advice is avail‐
able from a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 183
BMW X5 M and BMW X6 M Technology Driving tips
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐
other (break-in time).
The following instructions will help accomplish
a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 84.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but
do not exceed 5,500 rpm and
106 mph/170 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
At 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Have drive-in checkup maintenance per‐
formed.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,100 miles/5,000 km
The engine and road speed can gradually be
increased to a constant speed of
137 mph/220 km/h.
Use the maximum speed of 155 mph/250 km/h
only briefly, e.g., when passing.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
M Compound brakes require an initial break-in
period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve
optimal performance between brake discs and
brake pads. Drive moderately during this
break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the vehicle interior. There is risk of injuries or
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Seite 184
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the body, e.g.
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combus‐
tible materials, such as leaves or grass, come
in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas
system, these materials can ignite. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that no combustible materials can come in
contact with hot vehicle parts in driving opera‐
tion, idle or during parking. Do not touch the
hot exhaust system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the send operations of mobile phones.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. If possible, in the car's interior use only
mobile phones with direct connections to an
exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
disturbance and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
CAUTION
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is risk of property damage.
When driving through water, do not exceed the
maximum indicated water level and the maxi‐
mum speed for driving through water.◀
Drive though calm water only and only if it is
not deeper than 17.6 inches/45 cm and at this
height, no faster than walking speed, up to
3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations needed.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
The pulsing of the brake pedal indicates that
ABS is in its active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can cause functional problems.
However, this has no effect on the perform‐
ance and operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the movement area around
pedals and floor area
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
Seite 185
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g. for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
press brake pedal ever so gently every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of
an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on
the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle or with the engine switched off,
safety-relevant functions are restricted or not
available anymore, e.g. braking effect of the
engine or braking force and steering support.
There is risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle
or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down in sequential mode, refer to
page 81.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion will built up when the maximum
pressure applied to the brake pads during
braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
cleaned.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops collecting under‐
neath the vehicle.
These traces of water under the vehicle are
normal.
Ground clearance
CAUTION
If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear spoiler
e.g. when driving over curbs or entering into
underground car parking garages. There is risk
of property damage. Ensure that there is suffi‐
cient ground clearance available.◀
Driving on poor roads
The vehicle combines all-wheel drive with the
advantages of a normal automobile.
CAUTION
Objects in unpaved areas, e.g. stones or
branches, can damage the vehicle. There is
risk of property damage. Do not drive on un‐
paved terrain.◀
For your own safety, for the safety of passen‐
gers and of the vehicle, heed the following
points:
▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before
starting a trip; do not take risks in driving.
Seite 186
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface con‐
ditions. The steeper and more uneven the
road surface, the slower the speed should
be.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to
near the MAX mark. Uphill and downhill
grades can be traveled up to no more than
50 %.
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
Control HDC, refer to page 136.
Starting out is possible on uphill grades up
to 32 %. The permissible side tilt is 50 %.
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in
contact with the ground.
The ground clearance is no more than 7.8
inches/20 cm and can vary according to
the vehicle's load.
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the
accelerator so that driving stability control
systems can distribute the driving force to
the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Trac‐
tion Control if available.
After a trip on poor roads
After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and
tires for damage to maintain driving safety.
Clear heavy soiling from the body.
Seite 187
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally, and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. There is risk of
an accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed the
permitted gross weight.◀
CAUTION
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g.
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐
rior.◀
Determining the load limit
1.
Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Seite 188
Driving tips Loading
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Use the trunk partition net, refer to
page 170, to protect passengers. Make
sure that objects cannot penetrate the
trunk partition net.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the trunk with rails
To secure the cargo there are four movable
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
To slide the lashing eyes, press the button, ar‐
row 1. Make sure that the lashing eyes latch at
the new position.
The lashing eyes at the openings in the rails
can be removed.
Cargo net, FlexNet
The flexible cargo net is hooked into eyes and
offers a stowage option in the cargo area. The
storage net can be attached to the following
eyes:
Seite 189
Loading Driving tips
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
BMW X5 M:
BMW X6 M:
▷ Lashing eyes in the rails.
▷ Eyes on the trunk wall.
The eyes are located on both sides of the
trunk.
Securing cargo
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, e.g. in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is risk of injuries. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining
straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in
the trunk.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Information
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g. with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
Seite 190
Driving tips Loading
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Seite 191
Loading Driving tips
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Seite 192
Driving tips Saving fuel
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of
the vehicle, refer to page 95.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle
automatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 218.
Seite 193
Saving fuel Driving tips
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 198, prior to refueling.
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
Fuel lid
Opening
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.
3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap be
jammed and crushed during closing. In this
case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and
fuel vapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of
injuries or risk of property damage. Pay atten‐
tion that the retaining strap is not jammed or
crushed when closing the lid.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E. g. in the event of an electrical malfunction.
The release is located in the trunk.
Seite 196
Mobility Refueling
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
1. Open the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when
refueling
CAUTION
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. On contact with painted surfaces, dam‐
age may occur to these surfaces. The
environment is polluted. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid overfilling.◀
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Seite 197
Refueling Mobility
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter helps make a cold start easier, e.g.
Information
CAUTION
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐
gine problems, for instance poor engine start-
up behavior, poor handling and/or poor
performance. There is risk of property damage.
In case of engine problems, switch gas sta‐
tions or use a brand name fuel with a higher
octane rating.◀
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
CAUTION
Even small amounts of wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
converter is permanently damaged. There is
risk of property damage. Do not refuel or add
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g. manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
CAUTION
Wrong fuels can damage the fuel system
and the engine. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol
percentage than recommended or one with
other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
CAUTION
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is risk of prop‐
Seite 198
Mobility Fuel
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
erty damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not
comply with the minimum quality.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Seite 199
Fuel Mobility
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g. twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the trunk regularly, and
correct it as needed.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar, 2 psi.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
Monitor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 201, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 201, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 200
Mobility Wheels and tires
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
X5 M
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
285/40 R 20
108 V M+S XL
2.5 / 36 2.2 / 31
Front: 285/40 R
20 104 Y
Rear: 325/35 R
20 108 Y
2.5 / 3 6
-
-
2.5 / 36
Front: 285/35 R
21 105 Y XL
Rear: 325/30 R
21 108 Y XL
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.5 / 36
Emergency
wheel:
T 155/80 R 19
114 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
X6 M
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
285/40 R 20
108 V M+S XL
2.5 / 36 2.2 / 31
Front: 285/40 R
20 104 Y
Rear: 325/35 R
20 108 Y
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.5 / 36
Front: 285/35 R
21 105 Y XL
Rear: 325/30 R
21 108 Y XL
2.5 / 36
-
-
2.5 / 36
Emergency
wheel:
T 155/80 R 19
114 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Seite 201
Wheels and tires Mobility
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
X5 M
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
285/40 R 20
108 V M+S XL
2.9 /42 2.9 /42
Front: 285/40 R
20 104 Y
Rear: 325/35 R
20 108 Y
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.7 / 39
Front: 285/35 R
21 105 Y XL
Rear: 325/30 R
21 108 Y XL
3.0 / 43
-
-
3,1 / 44
Emergency
wheel:
T 155/80 R 19
114 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
X6 M
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
285/40 R 20
108 V M+S XL
2.9 /42 2.9 /42
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Front: 285/40 R
20 104 Y
Rear: 325/35 R
20 108 Y
2.7 / 39
-
-
2.7 / 39
Front: 285/35 R
21 105 Y XL
Rear: 325/30 R
21 108 Y XL
3.0 / 44
-
-
3,1 / 44
Emergency
wheel:
T 155/80 R 19
114 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115
Seite 202
Mobility Wheels and tires
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0115: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the
1st week of 2015.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Seite 203
Wheels and tires Mobility
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Information
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is risk of an accident. If tire dam‐
age is suspected while driving, immediately re‐
duce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to
the nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is risk of an accident. Do not re‐
pair damaged tires, but have them replaced.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the right wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Seite 204
Mobility Wheels and tires
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, e. g. due to contact with the body due to
tolerances despite the same official size rating.
There is risk of an accident.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
WARNING
Retreated tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Do not use retreated tires.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The plate is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against switching wheels between the front
and rear axles. This can impair the handling
characteristics.
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the
front and rear axles.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Seite 205
Wheels and tires Mobility
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
The concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed quickly to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
Information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportu‐
nity and have them replaced if needed.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
Storage
The Mobility System is located behind the left
side trim in the trunk.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Seite 206
Mobility Wheels and tires
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Compressor
1 Holder for bottle
2 Compressor
3 Connector/cable for socket
4 Connection hose
5 On/off switch
6 Inflation pressure dial
7 Reduce inflation pressure
Filling the tire with sealant
1.
Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the
compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.
3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐
nector of the sealant container.
4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐
pressor housing in an upright position.
5. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
Seite 207
Wheels and tires Mobility
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
6. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
CAUTION
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐
nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1.
Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the sealant container.
3. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer previously connected to the tire
valve with the available connector on the
sealant container.
This prevents leftover sealant from escap‐
ing from the container.
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the trunk.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
To correct the tire inflation pressure
1.
Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
2.5 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, switch
on the compressor.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
Seite 208
Mobility Wheels and tires
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 285/40 R 20
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, if needed
briefly activate M Dynamic Mode.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Seite 209
Wheels and tires Mobility
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Important features in the engine comp.
1 Washer fluid reservoir
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Coolant reservoir for charge air cooling
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
5 Coolant reservoir for engine cooling
6 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
7 Oil filler neck
Seite 210
Mobility Engine compartment
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Hood
Information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage components and
lead to a safety risk. There is risk of accidents
or risk of property damage.◀
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents can move in the engine compartment
with the vehicle switched off, e.g. the cooler
fan. There is risk of injuries. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, e.g. lock
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is risk of
injuries. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk
of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on opening
and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening the hood
1. Pull the lever.
2. Press the release handle and open the
hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Seite 211
Engine compartment Mobility
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Seite 212
Mobility Engine compartment
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are not
approved.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
When a dynamic driving style is used, such as
when cornering fast, the system is unable to
measure the engine oil level. With this driving
style, measure the engine oil level using a de‐
tailed measurement, refer to page 214.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display
▷ Detailed measurement
Electronic oil measurement
Status display
The concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Engine oil level display messages
CAUTION
A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage. Im‐
mediately add engine oil.◀
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
CAUTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 213
Engine oil Mobility
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low, within the next
125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to
page 214.
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Requirements
▷ Vehicle is on level road.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N
and accelerator pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Information
CAUTION
A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage.
Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
CAUTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g. oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 210.
Opening the oil filler neck
1.
Opening the hood, refer to page 211
Seite 214
Mobility Engine oil
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise.
3. Add motor oil.
Engine oil types to add
Information
CAUTION
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is risk of property damage. Do not use
oil additives.◀
CAUTION
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is risk
of property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect viscosity grade.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the
engine oil belongs to the viscosity grade SAE
0W-40. As an alternative, you can also use en‐
gine oil with a viscosity grade of SAE 0W-30.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
Oil rating
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Oil rating
API SL or superior oil rating.
Engine oil change
CAUTION
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you let the dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the motor oil.
Seite 215
Engine oil Mobility
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
The vehicle has two coolant reservoirs that are
located in the engine compartment.
To ensure the operational reliability of the vehi‐
cle, always check the coolant level of both
coolant reservoirs.
Information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
burns. There is risk of injuries. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is risk of
injuries and risk of property damage. Avoid the
contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with
additives. Do not swallow any additives. Use
suitable additives only.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Coolant level
Overview
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment.
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Seite 216
Mobility Coolant
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Close cap.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 217
Coolant Mobility
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐
nizes the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
Detailed information on service requirements,
refer to page 94, can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Seite 218
Mobility Maintenance
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Information
CAUTION
Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis can lead to vehicle malfunctions.
There is risk of property damage. The manu‐
facturer of your vehicle strongly recommends
access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be
limited to a dealer's service center, another
qualified service center or repair shop or other
authorized persons.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 219
Maintenance Mobility
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
1.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
2. Remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Wiper blade replacement
Information
CAUTION
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades
1.
To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 79, the wiper arms.
2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
Seite 220
Mobility Replacing components
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
3. Fold open the holder.
4. Slide wiper blade out of the wiper arm.
5. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on
until it you hear it snap into the holder.
6. Fold down the wipers.
BMW X5 M: replacing the rear wiper
blade
1.
Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.
3. Continue turning the wiper blade all the
way so that it pops out of the holder.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the holder
until you hear it snap into place.
5. Fold the wipers in.
Lamp and bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have appropriate work performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here.
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is
risk of injuries. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is risk of inju‐
ries or risk of property damage. When working
on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
CAUTION
Contaminated bulbs reduce their service
life. There is risk of property damage. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a
clean cloth or something similar, or hold the
bulb by its base.◀
Xenon headlights
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
Seite 221
Replacing components Mobility
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is risk of
injuries. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources for an extended period of
time. Do not remove the LED covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Front lights, bulb replacement
Xenon headlights
Information
Because of the long service life of these bulbs,
the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching
the lights on and off frequently shortens their
service life.
If a bulb fails, turn on the front fog lights and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Overview
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights
2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher
3 Turn signal
Xenon headlights
Cornering lamp, low beams and high beams
are designed with xenon technology.
Seite 222
Mobility Replacing components
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
The parking lights and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology.
Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop in the
event of a malfunction.
LED headlights
With LED headlights, all front lights and side
indicators are designed with LED technology.
If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lights
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop in the
event of a malfunction.
Turn signal
Information
Follow general instructions, refer to page 221.
Replacement
21-watt bulb, PY 21W.
1.
Opening the hood, refer to page 211
2. Unscrew the lid counterclockwise and re‐
move it carefully.
The bulb is attached to the lid.
3. Turn the bulb clockwise to remove it.
4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. Contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop in the event of a malfunction.
LED front fog lights
These front fog lights are made using LED
technology. Contact a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop in the event of a malfunction.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
LED tail lights
These tail lights are made using LED technol‐
ogy. Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop in
the event of a malfunction.
Changing wheels
Information
When sealants are used, an immediate wheel
change when there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure in the event of a flat tire is unneces‐
sary.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
accessories from your dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 223
Replacing components Mobility
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Emergency wheel
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake and engage lever in
position P P.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid
and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slip‐
pery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., the
vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the
side.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine; other‐
wise, a fatal hazard exists.
Information
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is risk of injuries. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
Overview
The emergency wheel and the tools are lo‐
cated in the trunk under the cargo floor panel.
1 Emergency wheel
2 Vehicle jack
3 Vehicle jack crank
4 Wheel lug wrench
Removing the emergency wheel
1.
Remove tool holder.
2. Unscrew the wing nut 1.
3. Remove the washer 2 to the side.
4. Remove emergency wheel.
Seite 224
Mobility Replacing components
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Prepare wheel change
1. Follow the Safety instructions, refer to
page 224.
2. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking up the vehicle
1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel such that the vehicle
jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle
jacking point with the entire surface on the
ground.
2. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan‐
gular recess of the jacking point for crank‐
ing it up.
3. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts
off of the ground.
Wheel mounting
Mount one emergency wheel only.
1.
Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove
the wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts.
If original BMW light alloy wheels are not
mounted, any accompanying lug bolts also
have to be used.
3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle
jack.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the trunk.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos‐
sible.
Driving with emergency wheel
WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular di‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may occur
at higher speeds, e.g. reduced lane stability
when braking, longer braking distance and
changed self-steering properties in the limit
area. There is risk of an accident. Drive moder‐
ately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 225
Replacing components Mobility
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Battery replacement
CAUTION
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions.There is risk of property damage.
Information on the compatible vehicle batteries
is available at your dealer's service center.◀
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
battery be registered on the vehicle by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop to ensure that all
comfort features are fully available and that any
Check Control messages of these comfort fea‐
tures are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month.
Information
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12V on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
terminals in the engine compartment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 230, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐
tings updated, e. g.:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to
page 52.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse
and do not replace a nonworking fuse with a
substitute of another color or amperage rat‐
ing.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the trunk.
Seite 226
Mobility Replacing components
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
In the car's interior
Loosen fasteners, arrows, and open cover.
In the trunk
Open the cover on the right side trim, arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 227
Replacing components Mobility
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Intelligent Emergency
Request
The concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through this system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner
Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
button lights up green.
▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
Request was initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
the Emergency Request can be aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
When the emergency request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
Seite 228
Mobility Breakdown assistance
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serve to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Warning triangle
1.
Open the cover on the left side trim.
2. Lift the warning triangle slightly and re‐
move in the direction of the interior.
First-aid kit
Information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
1. Open the cover on the left side trim.
2. Remove the first-aid kit.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Seite 229
Breakdown assistance Mobility
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Preparation
CAUTION
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparks formation can occur.
There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to the
correct order during connection.◀
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
tive terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
Seite 230
Mobility Breakdown assistance
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Transporting the vehicle
Information
CAUTION
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
CAUTION
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Towing other vehicles
Information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make sure
that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀
CAUTION
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Seite 231
Breakdown assistance Mobility
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the BMW.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 220, are together in the cargo
area.
Information
CAUTION
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is risk of property damage.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
positioning the vehicle.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark of the cover to push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Seite 232
Mobility Breakdown assistance
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Car washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Information
CAUTION
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is risk of property damage. Maintain suf‐
ficient distance and do not spray too long con‐
tinuously. Follow the user's manual for the
high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 in/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 inches/80 cm.
Automatic car washes
Information
Note the following:
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
page 78, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
vation.
▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
be triggered by the interior motion sensor
of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
refer to page 48.
CAUTION
Too high guide rails in car washes can
damage body parts. There is risk of property
damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm.◀
Different types of tires
CAUTION
The vehicle might be too large for the car
wash. There is risk of property damage. Before
driving into the car wash, make sure that the
vehicle is not too large.◀
Seite 233
Care Mobility
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to
page 75.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
CAUTION
Selector lever position P is automati‐
cally engaged when the ignition is
switched off. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Do not switch ignition off in car
washes.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in selector lever position N. A signal
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
To start the engine:
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlights
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
with water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Car care products
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
using car care and cleaning products from
BMW.
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is risk of injuries. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Seite 234
Mobility Care
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
CAUTION
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. For
cleaning, use only water and suitable care
products, the manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐
ommends original BMW care products.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
car care products in order to avoid damage or
noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
CAUTION
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is risk of property damage.
Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth
lightly with water.◀
Seite 235
Care Mobility
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g. for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/Screens/protective glass of
the Head-up Display
CAUTION
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is risk of property damage.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.◀
CAUTION
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
Long-term
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 236
Mobility Care
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Seite 237
Care Mobility
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents, on labels on
the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
Seite 240
Reference Technical data
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
BMW X5 M
Width with mirrors inches/mm 86/2,184
Width without mirrors inches/mm 78.2/1,985
Height inches/mm 67.6/1,717
Length inches/mm 192.7/4,894
Wheelbase inches/mm 115.5/2,933
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 42/12.8
BMW X6 M
Width with mirrors inches/mm 85.5/2,170
Width without mirrors inches/mm 78.4/1,989
Seite 241
Technical data Reference
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
BMW X6 M
Height inches/mm 66.5/1,689
Length inches/mm 193.9/4,923
Wheelbase inches/mm 115.5/2,933
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 42/12.8
Weights
BMW X5 M
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,549/2,971
Load lbs/kg 1,170/531
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 3,130/1,420
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,595/1,631
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 38.5-76.7
Canada: trunk capacity 22.9-66/650-1,870
BMW X6 M
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,505/2,951
Load lbs/kg 1,170/531
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 3,130/1,420
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,549/1,610
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 26.6-59.7
Canada: trunk capacity 19.4-53.8/550-1,525
cu ft/liters
cu ft/liters
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Seite 243
Appendix Reference
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 132
Acceleration Assistant, refer
to Launch Control 84
Accessories and parts 7
Activated-charcoal filter 158
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 127
Active Protection 130
Active seat ventilation,
front 55
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 129
Adaptive Light Control 106
Additives, oil 215
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 53
After washing vehicle 234
Airbags 109
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 110
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
culated-air mode 157
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐
ing function 156
Air distribution, manual 157
Air flow, automatic climate
control 157
Air outlets, see ventila‐
tion 158
Air pressure, tires 200
Alarm system 47
Alarm, unintentional 48
All around the center con‐
sole 16
All around the roofliner 17
All around the steering
wheel 14
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 205
All-wheel-drive 136
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 163
Alternative oil types 215
Ambient light 108
Animal detection, see Night
Vision 122
Antifreeze, washer fluid 80
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 132
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 134
Approved axle load 241
Arrival time 98
Ashtray 164
Ashtray, front 164
Ashtray, rear 165
Assistance when driving
off 132
Assist system, see Intelligent
Safety 116
Attentiveness assistant 130
AUTO H button 74
AUTO H button, refer to Au‐
tomatic Hold 74
AUTO intensity 156
Automatic car wash 233
Automatic climate con‐
trol 155
Automatic Curb Monitor 61
Automatic deactivation,
Front-seat passenger air‐
bags 111
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 105
Automatic Hold 74
Automatic locking 46
Automatic recirculated-air
control 157
Automatic Soft Closing,
doors 40
Automatic tailgate 40
Automatic transmission 80
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 156
AUTO program, intensity 156
Auto Start/Stop function 71
Average fuel consumption 97
Average speed 98
Axle loads, weights 241
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 54
Backrest, seats 53
Backrest, width 55
Bad road trips 186
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 229
Bar for tow-starting/
towing 231
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 226
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 35
Battery, vehicle 225
Belts, safety belts 56
Beverage holder, cu‐
pholder 176
Blinds, sun protection 50
BMW Assist, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
BMW Driver’s Guide App 6
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 218
Seite 244
Reference Everything from A to Z
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
BMW M technology 182
Bottle holder, see Cu‐
pholder 176
Brake assistant 132
Brake discs, break-in 184
Brake force display 129
Brake lights, adaptive 129
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 129
Brake pads, break-in 184
Braking, hints 185
Breakdown assistance 228
Break-in 184
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 100
Bulb replacement 221
Bulb replacement, front 222
Bulb replacement, rear 223
Bulbs and lights 221
Button, Start/Stop 69
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 229
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 46
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 46
Calling up steering wheel ad‐
justment 46
Camera lenses, care 236
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 145
Camera, Side View 150
Camera, Top View 148
Can holder, see Cu‐
pholder 176
Car battery 225
Car care products 234
Care, displays 236
Care, vehicle 234
Cargo 188
Cargo area 169, 171
Cargo area, enlarg‐
ing 169, 171
Cargo area partition net 170
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 177
Cargo cover 169, 171
Cargo, securing 189
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 189
Car key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Carpet, care 236
Car wash 233
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 185
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 218
CD/Multimedia, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Center armrest 174
Center console 16
Central locking system 40
Central screen, see Control
Display 18
Changes, technical, see Own
Safety 7
Changing parts 220
Changing wheels 223
Changing wheels/tires 204
Chassis number, see vehicle
identification number 10
Check Control 87
Checking the engine oil level
electronically 213
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 213
Children, seating position 64
Children, transporting
safely 64
Child restraint fixing sys‐
tem 64
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 66
Child restraint fixing systems,
mounting 65
Child safety locks 68
Child seat, mounting 65
Child seats 64
Chrome parts, care 235
Cigarette lighter 165
Cleaning displays 236
Climate control 155
Clock 91
Closing/opening via door
lock 39
Closing/opening with remote
control 37
Closing the tailgate with no-
touch activation 44
Clothes hooks 177
Cockpit 14
Combination switch, refer to
Wiper system 77
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 76
Comfort Access 43
Compact wheel, see Emer‐
gency wheel 224
Compartments in the
doors 174
Compass 98
Compound brake 182
Compressor 206
Condensation on win‐
dows 158
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 186
Condition Based Service
CBS 218
Confirmation signal 46
ConnectedDrive, see user's
manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
ConnectedDrive Services
Connecting electrical devi‐
ces 166
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 99
Seite 245
Everything from A to Z Reference
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Controller 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 132
Convenient opening with the
remote control 38
Coolant 216
Coolant temperature 91
Cooler 167
Cooling function 156
Cooling, maximum 156
Cooling system 216
Cornering light 106
Corrosion on brake discs 186
Cosmetic mirror 164
Courtesy lamps during un‐
locking 37
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐
cle locked 38
Cruise control 140
Cruising range 92
Cupholder 176
Current fuel consumption 93
D
Damage, tires 204
Damping control 137
Data, technical 240
Date 92
Daytime running lights 106
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 158
Dehumidifying, air 156
Deleting personal data 24
Deletion of personal data 24
Departure time, parked-car
ventilation 161
Destination distance 98
Digital clock 91
Digital speed 92
Digital tachometer 92
Dimensions 240
Dimmable exterior mirrors 62
Dimmable interior rearview
mirror 62
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 76
Display EfficientDynamics 93
Display, electronic, instru‐
ment cluster 86
Display in windshield 101
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 108
Displays, cleaning 236
Disposal, coolant 217
Disposal, vehicle battery 226
Distance control, see
PDC 142
Distance to destination 98
Divided screen view, split
screen 23
Door lock 39
Door lock, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
ing 40
Downhill control 136
DPC, see Dynamic Perform‐
ance Control 132
Drivelogic 83
Drive mode 81
Drive-off assistant 132
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 134
Driving Dynamics Control 85
Driving instructions, break-
in 184
Driving notes, general 184
Driving on bad roads 186
Driving on racetracks 182
Driving program, refer to
Drivelogic 83
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 132
Driving tips 184
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 134
Dynamic driving systems 93
Dynamic driving, system
states 93
Dynamic Performance Con‐
trol DPC 132
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 134
E
EfficientDynamics 93
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 86
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 213
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 134
Emergency detection, remote
control 35
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 196
Emergency release, parking
brake 75
Emergency Request 228
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 35
Emergency unlocking, trans‐
mission lock 84
Emergency wheel 224
Energy Control 93
Energy recovery 93
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 71
Engine, automatic switch-
off 71
Engine compartment 210
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 211
Engine coolant 216
Engine oil 213
Engine oil, adding 214
Engine oil additives 215
Engine oil change 215
Engine oil filler neck 214
Engine oil temperature 91
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 215
Engine oil types, suitable 215
Seite 246
Reference Everything from A to Z
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 35
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 229
Engine start, refer to Starting
the engine 70
Engine stop 70
Engine temperature 91
Entering a car wash 233
Equipment, interior 162
Error displays, see Check
Control 87
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 134
Exchanging wheels/tires 204
Exhaust system 185
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 62
Exterior mirrors 61
External start 229
External temperature dis‐
play 91
External temperature warn‐
ing 91
Eyes for securing cargo 189
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 87
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 48
Fan, see Air flow 157
Filler neck for engine oil 214
Fine wood, care 235
First-aid kit 229
Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐
ting 232
Flat tire, changing
wheels 223
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 115
Flat tire, repairing 206
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 112
Flat tire, warning
lamp 113, 115
Flooding 185
Floor carpet, care 236
Floor mats, care 236
Folding back rear seat back‐
rests 169, 171
Fold-out position, wiper 79
Foot brake 185
Front airbags 109
Front center armrest 174
Front cupholder 176
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking func‐
tion 117
Front fog lamps, , LED, bulb
replacement 223
Front fog lights 107
Front lights 222
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 111
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 111
Front seats 53
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 115
Fuel 198
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 97
Fuel filler flap 196
Fuel gauge 91
Fuel lid 196
Fuel quality 198
Fuel recommendation 198
Fuel, tank capacity 242
Fuse 226
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 162
Gasoline 198
Gear change 82
Gear shift indicator 95
General driving notes 184
Glare shield 164
Glasses compartment 175
Glass sunroof, powered 50
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐
amic glass sunroof 50
Glove compartment 173
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 241
Ground clearance 186
H
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 73
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 163
Hazard warning flashers 228
HDC Hill Descent Con‐
trol 136
Head airbags 109
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 105
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 105
Headlight flasher 77
Headlight glass 222
Headlights 222
Headlights, care 234
Head restraints 53
Head restraints, front 58
Head restraints, rear 59
Head-up Display 101
Head-up Display, care 236
Head-up display, M view 101
Head-up display, standard
view 101
Heavy cargo, stowing 189
High-beam Assistant 106
High beams 77
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 106
Hill Descent Control
HDC 136
Hills 186
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 132
Holder for beverages 176
Homepage 6
Hood 211
Seite 247
Everything from A to Z Reference
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Horn 14
Hot exhaust system 185
HUD Head-up Display 101
Hydroplaning 185
I
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 91
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 91
Identification marks, tires 202
Identification number, see ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 10
iDrive 18
Ignition key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Ignition off 69
Ignition on 69
Indication of a flat
tire 113, 115
Indicator and alarm lamps,
see Check Control 87
Indicator lamp, see Check
Control 87
Individual air distribution 157
Individual settings, refer to M
Drive 133
Individual settings, see Per‐
sonal Profile 35
Inflation pressure, tires 200
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 115
Info display, refer to On-
Board computer 97
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 113
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 115
Instrument cluster 86
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 86
Instrument lighting 108
Integrated key 34
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 29
Intelligent Emergency Re‐
quest 228
Intelligent Safety 116
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 156
Interior equipment 162
Interior lights 108
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 37
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 38
Interior motion sensor 48
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
matic dimming feature 62
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 94
Interval mode 78
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 224
Jump-starting 229
K
Key/remote control 34
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 43
Key Memory, see Personal
Profile 35
Knee airbag 110
L
Label on recommended
tires 205
Lamp in the exterior mirror,
see Active Blind Spot De‐
tection 127
Lamp replacement 221
Lamp replacement, front 222
Lamp replacement, rear 223
Lane departure warning 125
Lane margin, warning 125
Language on Control Dis‐
play 100
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 189
LATCH child restraint sys‐
tem 66
Launch Control 84
Leather, care 234
LED headlights, bulb replace‐
ment 223
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 222
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 25
Light 104
Light alloy wheels, care 235
Light control 106
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 222
Lighting 104
Lights and bulbs 221
Light switch 104
Load 189
Loading 188
Lock, door 39
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 39
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 37
Locking, automatic 46
Locking, settings 46
Lock, power window 49
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 68
Low beams 104
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 106
Lower back support 54
Lower tailgate 43
Low Speed Assistant 81
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 190
Lumbar support 54
Seite 248
Reference Everything from A to Z
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
M
Maintenance 218
Maintenance require‐
ments 218
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 94
Maintenance system,
BMW 218
Make-up mirror 164
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 87
Malfunction, self-leveling sus‐
pension 139
Manual air distribution 157
Manual air flow 157
Manual brake, see Parking
brake 73
Manual operation, door
lock 39
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 61
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 196
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 143
Manual operation, parking
brake 75
Manual operation, rearview
camera 146
Manual operation, Top
View 149
Master key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Maximum cooling 156
Maximum speed, display 95
Maximum speed, winter
tires 205
M Compound brake 182
MDM, M Dynamic Mode 134
M Drive 133
M Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 85
M Dynamic Mode MDM 134
Measurement, units of 100
Medical kit 229
Memory for seat, mirrors,
steering wheel 60
Menu EfficientDynamics 93
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 96
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
ing concept 20
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 87
Microfilter 158
Minimum tread, tires 204
Mirror 61
Mirror memory 60
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 185
Mobility System 206
Modifications, technical, see
Own Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 222
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint
systems 65
Moving sun visor 164
M Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion 80
M technology 182
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
M view, Head-up display 101
N
Navigation, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 58
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 59
Neutral cleaner, see wheel
cleaner 235
New wheels and tires 204
Night Vision 122
Night Vision device, see Night
Vision 122
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 231
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 219
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 219
Object detection, see Night
Vision 122
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 147
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 198
Odometer 91
Office, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Offroad trips 186
Oil 213
Oil, adding 214
Oil additives 215
Oil change 215
Oil change interval, service
requirements 94
Oil filler neck 214
Oil types, alternative 215
Oil types, suitable 215
Old batteries, disposal 226
On-board computer 97
On-board computer, refer to
On-board computer 97
Onboard monitor, see Control
Display 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 220
Opening/closing via door
lock 39
Opening and closing 34
Opening and closing, without
remote control 39
Opening and closing, with re‐
mote control 37
Opening the tailgate with no-
touch activation 44
Seite 249
Everything from A to Z Reference
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Optional equipment, standard
equipment 7
Outside air, refer to Auto‐
matic recirculated-air con‐
trol 157
Overheating of engine, see
Coolant temperature 91
Own Safety 7
P
Paint, vehicle 234
Panoramic glass sunroof 50
Parallel parking assistant 151
Park Distance Control
PDC 142
Parked-car ventilation 160
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 186
Parking aid, see PDC 142
Parking assistant 151
Parking brake 73
Parking lights 104
Parking with Automatic
Hold 74
Parts and accessories 7
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 61
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 146
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 142
Pedestrian detection, see
Night Vision 122
Pedestrian warning with city
braking function 120
Personal Profile 35
Personal Profile, exporting
profiles 36
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 51
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 49
Plastic, care 235
Power failure 226
Power sunroof, glass 50
Power windows 48
Prescribed engine oil
types 215
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 200
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 115
Preventing Auto Start
Stop 72
Profile, see Personal Pro‐
file 35
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 24
Protective function, glass
sunroof 51
Protective function, win‐
dows 49
Push-and-turn switch, see
Controller 19
R
Radiator fluid 216
Radio-operated key, see Re‐
mote control 34
Radio ready state 69
Radio, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Rain sensor 78
Rear automatic climate con‐
trol 159
Rear center armrest 175
Rear cooler 167
Rear drink holder 176
Rear lights 223
Rear seats 56
Rearview camera 145
Rearview mirror 61
Rear window defroster 158
Recirculated-air mode 157
Recommended fuel
grade 198
Recommended tire
brands 205
Refueling 196
Remaining range 92
Remote control/key 34
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 39
Remote control, univer‐
sal 162
Replacement fuse 226
Replacing parts 220
Replacing wheels/tires 204
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 10
RES button, see Cruise con‐
trol 140
Reserve warning, see
Range 92
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 113
Residual heat, automatic cli‐
mate control 157
Retaining straps, securing
cargo 189
Retreaded tires 205
Roadside parking lights 105
Roller sunblinds 50
RON recommended fuel
grade 198
Roofliner 17
Roof load capacity 241
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 190
Rope for tow-starting/
towing 231
Rubber components,
care 235
S
Safe braking 185
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 57
Safety belts 56
Safety belts, care 236
Safety Package, see Active
Protection 130
Seite 250
Reference Everything from A to Z
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Safety switch, windows 49
Safety systems, airbags 109
Saving fuel 192
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 220
Screw thread, refer to Screw
thread for tow fitting, screw
thread for tow fitting 232
Sealant 206
Seat belts, see Safety
belts 56
Seat heating, front 55
Seat heating, rear 56
Seating position for chil‐
dren 64
Seat, mirror, and steering
wheel memory 60
Seats 53
Seats, front 53
Seats, rear 56
Seat ventilation, front 55
Selection list in instrument
cluster 96
Selector lever 81
Selector lever position 81
Self-leveling suspension, air
suspension 139
Self-leveling suspension,
malfunction 139
Sensors, care 236
Sequential mode 81
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 218
Service requirements, dis‐
play 94
Services, ConnectedDrive
Servotronic 138
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 140
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 46
Settings, M Drive 133
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 99
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
rors, steering wheel 60
Shift point indicator 102
Shoulder support 55
Side airbags 109
Side View 149
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 46
Sitting safely 53
Size 240
Ski and snowboard bag 172
Slide/tilt glass roof 50
Smoker's package 164
Snow chains 209
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 219
Sockets, see Connecting
electrical devices 166
SOS button 228
Spare fuse 226
Spare tire, see Emergency
wheel 224
Speed, average 98
Speed limit detection, on-
board computer 98
Speed limiter, display 95
Speed Limit Information 95
Speed warning 99
Split screen 23
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 99
Stability control systems 132
Standard view, Head-up dis‐
play 101
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 71
Start/Stop button 69
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 35
Starting the engine 70
Status control display,
tires 113
Status information, iDrive 23
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Steering assistance 138
Steering wheel, adjusting 62
Steering wheel heating 63
Steering wheel memory 60
Stopping the engine 70
Storage compartment on the
center console 174
Storage compartments 173
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 173
Storage, tires 205
Storing the vehicle 236
Suitable engine oil types 215
Summer tires, tread 204
Sun visor 164
Supplementary text mes‐
sage 90
Surround View 145
Switch, refer to Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 23
SYNC program, automatic cli‐
mate control 157
System states of dynamic
driving 93
T
Tachometer 91
Tailgate, automatic 40
Tailgate, closing with no-
touch activation 44
Tailgate, opening with no-
touch activation 44
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 38
Tail lights 223
Technical changes, see Own
Safety 7
Technical data 240
Technology, BMW M 182
Telephone, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Seite 251
Everything from A to Z Reference
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 156
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 91
Temperature, engine oil 91
Terminal, starting aid 230
Text message, supplemen‐
tary 90
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 47
Thermal camera, see Night
Vision 122
Thigh support 54
Tilt alarm sensor 48
Time of arrival 98
Tire damage 204
Tire identification marks 202
Tire inflation pressure 200
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 115
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 112
Tires, changing 204
Tire sealant 206
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 200
Tire tread 204
Tone, see user's manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tool 220
Top View 148
Total vehicle weight 241
Touchpad 21
Tow fitting 232
Towing 231
Tow lug, see Tow fitting 232
Tow-starting 231
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 112
Transmission 80
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking 84
Transporting children
safely 64
Tread, tires 204
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 77
Trip odometer 91
Trip on-board computer 98
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 91
Turning circle lines, rearview
camera 146
Turn signals, operation 76
U
Unintentional alarm 48
Units of measurement 100
Universal remote control 162
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 39
Unlocking/locking with re‐
mote control 37
Unlocking, settings 46
Unpaved roads, cross-coun‐
try trips 186
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 235
USB interface 167
V
V8 high-performance engine,
High-performance engine
V8 182
Vanity mirror 164
Vehicle battery 225
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 226
Vehicle, break-in 184
Vehicle care 234
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 10
Vehicle jack 224
Vehicle paint 234
Vehicle storage 236
Vehicle wash 233
Ventilation 158
Ventilation, see Parked-car
ventilation 160
Venting, see ventilation 158
Vent, see ventilation 158
Vertical Dynamic Control 137
VIN, see vehicle identification
number 10
Voice activation system 26
W
Warning and indicator lamps,
see Check Control 87
Warning displays, see Check
Control 87
Warning lamp in the exterior
mirror, see Active Blind Spot
Detection 127
Warning messages, see
Check Control 87
Warning triangle 229
Warranty 7
Washer fluid 80
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 79
Washer system 77
Washing, vehicle 233
Water on roads 185
Weights 241
Welcome lamps during un‐
locking 37
Welcome lights 105
Wheel cleaner 235
Wheels, changing 204
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 200
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 115
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 112
Window defroster, rear 158
Windows, powered 48
Windshield washer fluid 80
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 79
Seite 252
Reference Everything from A to Z
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 77
Windshield washer system,
see washer/wiper sys‐
tem 77
Windshield wiper 77
Winter storage, care 236
Winter tires, suitable
tires 205
Winter tires, tread 204
Wiper 77
Wiper blades, replacing 220
Wiper fluid 80
Wiper, fold-out position 79
Wiper system 77
Wood, care 235
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 25
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 220
X
xDrive 136
Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
placement 222
Seite 253
Everything from A to Z Reference
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
BMW M
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
01 40 2 964 090 ue
*BL296409000S*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 964 090 - VI/15
